Skip to main content

Full text of "The elementary principles of graphic statics, specially prepared for students of science and technical schools, and those entering for the examinations of the Board of Education in building construction, machine construction, drawing, applied mechanics, and for other similar examinations"

See other formats


THE 

ELEMENTARY    PRINCIPLES 

OF 

GRAPHIC    STATICS 


Th. 


Elementary  Principles 

of 

Graphic  Statics 


SPECIALLY  PREPARED  FOR  STUDENTS  OF  SCIENCE 
AND  TECHNICAL  SCHOOLS,  AND  THOSE  ENTERING 
FOR  THE  EXAMINATIONS  OF  THE  BOARD  OF  EDU- 
CATION IN  BUILDING  CONSTRUCTION,  MACHINE 
CONSTRUCTION,  DRAWING,  APPLIED  MECHANICS, 
AND     FOR     OTHER    SIMILAR    EXAMINATIONS 


BY 

EDWARD     HARDY 

Teaclier  of  Building  ConsU  uction  ;    Certificates  :  —  Honours    in 
Masonry  and  Brickwork ;  Prizeman  and  Medallist  in  Masonry,  etc. 


ILLUSTRATED     BY     192    DIAGRAMS 


LONDON 
B.   T.   BATSFORD    94   HIGH   HOLBORN 

1904 


Butler  &  Tanner, 

The  selwood  printing  Works. 

frome,  and  london. 


270 
H35 


PREFACE 

The  following  chapters  are  placed  before  students  of 
Building  Construction,  Applied  Mechanics,  and  Machine 
Construction  and  Drawing,  in  the  hope  that  they  may 
be  of  service  to  those  who  desire  aid  in  the  study  of  the 
"  Statics  "  branch  of  these  subjects. 

It  should  be  stated  that,  in  the  chapter  on  Graphic 
Arithmetic,  only  such  matter  has  been  introduced  as 
is  deemed  necessary  for  the  study  of  the  succeeding 
chapters. 

The  author  desires  to  express  his  gratitude  to  Pro- 
fessor Henry  Adams,  M.I.C.E.,  M.I.M.E.,  F.S.I.,  etc., 
for  his  kindness  in  reading  through  the  MS.,  and  for 
his  valuable  help  and  advice. 

EDWARD  HARDY. 

Saxatile,  Merthyr  Tydfil, 
December,   1903. 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  I 

Graphic  Arithmetic 


PAGE 


Graphic  Representation  of  Quantities — Advantage  of 
Decimally-divided  Scales — Addition — Subtraction — 
Similar  Triangles  —  Multiplication  —  Division  —  Pro- 
portion— Examples  ......  9 

CHAPTER  II 

Force 

Definition,  how  Measured  and  how  Represented  — 
Resultant  —  Equilibrium  —  Equilibrant  —  Parallel 
Forces — Reaction — Moments  and  how  Measured — 
Point  of  Application  of  the  Resultant  of  Parallel 
Forces — The  Three  Orders  of  Levers — Solution  of 
Levers — Cranked  or  Bent  Levers — Examples         .  22 

CHAPTER  III 

Centre  of  Gravity 

Of  a  Parallelogram — Of  a  Triangle — Of  a  Trapezium 
— Of  any  Quadrilateral  Figure — A  Door  as  a  Lever — 
Bow's  Notation — Load — Stress — Strain — Examples    .        44 

CHAPTER  IV 

Non-Parallel  Forces 

Parallelogram  of  Forces — Triangle  of  Forces — Reso- 
lution of  Forces — Inclined  Plane — Bent  Levers — 
Reaction  of  Door  Hinges — Lean-to  Roofs — Retaining 
Walls  for  Water  and  Earth — Polygon  of  Forces — 
Examples        ........        58 

CHAPTER  V 

Funicular  Polygon 
Links,     Pole,     and     Polar     Lines     or    Vectors — Solution 
of    Parallel    Forces — Reactions    of    the    Supports    of 

7 


CONTENTS 


PAOK 


Framed  Structures — The  Load  Supported  by  a  Roof 
Truss,  and  how  it  is  Conveyed  to  it —  Centre  of 
Pressure  of  Irregular  Masses — Examples  .  .        84 

CHAPTER  VI 

Graphic  Solution  of  Bending  Moment 

How  to  Obtain  the  B.M.  Scale — Cantilevers  Loaded 
at  Different  Points — Beams  with  a  Uniformly  Dis- 
tributed Load  and  Supported  at  Both  Ends — How 
to  draw  a  Parabola — Cantilevers  with  a  Uniformly 
Distributed  Load — Cantilevers  and  Beams  Supported 
at  Both  Ends  with  the  B.M.  Diagrams  for  Concentrated 
and  Uniformly  Distributed  Loads  Combined — 
Shearing  Force — S.F.  Diagrams:  for  Cantilevers 
Loaded  at  Different  Points — for  Cantilevers  with 
Uniformly  Distributed  Loads — for  Cantilevers  with 
Combined  Concentrated  and  Uniformly  Distributed 
Loads — for  Beams  Supported  at  Both  Ends  with 
Concentrated  Loads,  with  Uniformly  Distributed 
Loads,  and  with  Concentrated  and  Uniformly  Dis- 
tributed Loads  Combined — Examples         .  .  .106 

CHAPTER  VII 

Explanation  of  Reciprocal  or  Stress  Diagrams 

Rules  for  Drawing  Stress  Diagrams  —  Span  Roof — 
Couple  Close — Couple  Close  with  a  King-rod  Added — 
King-post  Truss — Other  Forms  of  Roof  Trusses 
— Framed  Cantilevers  —  Apportioning  Distributed 
Loads — How  to  Obtain  the  Magnitude  of  the  Stresses 
of  the  Members  of  Framed  Cantilevers  and  Girders 
from  the  Stress  Diagrams — Warren  Girder  with  a 
Concentrated  Load  on  the  Top  Flange — Warren 
Girder  with  a  Uniformly  Distributed  Load  on  the 
Top  Flange — Warren  Girder  with  a  Uniformly 
Distributed  Load  on  the  Bottom  Flange — N"  Girder 
with  a  Uniformly  Distributed  Load  on  the  Top  Flange 
— N  Girder  with  a  Concentrated  Load  on  the  Top 
Flange — N  Girder  with  Concentrated  Loads  on  the 
Bottom  Flange — Lattice  Girder  Without  Verticals — 
Lattice  Girder  With  Verticals — Examples  .  .127 


Answers  to  Examples         .         .         .  .162 


Errata. 

Page  30.     6tli  line,  for  "  say  |'  =  1"  " 
read  "  say  ^"  —  1'." 

Page  147.  8th  line  from  bottom, /or 
'"bcxce"  read  "bc+ce." 


^\:'-'-m»-i-i 


CHAPTER     I 


GRAPHIC    ARITHMETIC 


1.  In  ordinary  arithmetic  a  number  (unity)  is  chosen, 
and  all  quantities  expressed  in  multiples  of  that  num- 
ber :  thus,  5  means  that  unity  is  taken  5  times,  and 
4-5  means  that  unity  is  taken  4-5  times. 

Calculations  are  then  made  arithmetically. 

2.  Instead  of  expressing  unity  by  a  figure  we  can 
express  it  by  a  line.  All  other  quantities  are  then 
represented  by  lines  whose  lengths  are  proportional 
to  the  magnitudes  they  represent. 

Let  a  line  J'^  long  represent  unity,  then  5  would  be 
expressed  by  a  line  five  times  as  long,  and  4-5  would 
be  expressed  by  a  line  four  and  one-half  times  as  long. 
Again,  let  a  line  f'  long  represent  one  article  (or  1  yd., 
1  hr.,  etc.),  then  12  articles  (or  12  yds.,  12  hrs.,  etc.) 
would  be  shown  by  a  line  twelve  times  as  long,  i.e.  by 
a  9""  line. 

It.  will  thus  be  seen  that,  after  having  decided  upon 
a  unit  length,  any  quantity,  whether  abstract  or  con- 
crete, can  be  expressed  by  lines. 

When  the  quantities  are  represented  by  lines,  the 
calculations  are  made  by  means  of  geometrical  draw- 
ings, i.e.  "  graphically." 

3.  This  work,  being  intended  for  students  who  are 


10 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


already  familiar  with  geometry,  it  is  assumed  that 
scale  drawing  is  understood. 

A  rule,  with  all  tlie  divisions  continued  to  the  edge 
and  with  the  inch  and  the  subdivisions  of  the  inch 
ih  i?  h  h  8'  ^^^•)  being  divided  into  tenths,  will  be 
found  the  most  convenient.  An  ordinary  flat  rule 
marked  on  both  faces  would  contain  8  such  scales, 
while  a  triangular  one  would  contain  12. 

The  measurements  should  be  transferred  to  the 
paper  (or  read  off)  by  applying  the  edge  of  the  rule 
directly  to  the  line,  and  not  with  the  dividers. 


A: 

^SC  :- 

^D 

■    ,. 

Mil     Ml! 

\\\\\\\\\ 

h 

30                20 

n 

27 

2 

/ 

0 

0 

1 

/4 

^ 

01 

0 

J 

0 

1 

It 

\zz 

IIIIMIII 

1  1  [  i  1  M  M 

Fig.   1. 

4.  The  numbers  1,  2,  3,  etc.,  can  also  be  read  as  10, 
20,   30,   etc.,  when  the  tenths  will  become  units  and 
the  hundredths  will  become  tenths.     In  a  similar  way 
they  may  be  read  as  hundreds,  thousands,  etc. 
For  example  see  Fig.  1,  where  : — 

if  f'  =  1    unit,    then  A  B  =  115  units 
„  f'  =  10  units,  then  AB  =  17-5    „ 
„r  =  ioo    „       „   AB  =  n5-    „ 
„  r  =  1000  „        „    AB  =  1750-  „ 
and,  if  |''  =  1  yd.,1  lb.,  etc.,then  C  Z)  =  2-4  yds.,lbs.,etc. 
„    „  f'  =  10  yds.,  lbs.,  etc.,  „  O  i)  =  24      „     „      „ 
„    „r  =  100     „     „      „       „  CD  =  2^0-  „     „      „ 


5'     8 


1000 


CD  =  2400 


GRAPHIC   ARITHMETIC 


11 


5.  Sometimes  the  unit  is  given  by  means  of  a  line 
whose  length  is  not  stated.  In  order  to  find  the 
numerical  value  of  a  line  when  the  unit  is  given  thus, 
it  is  advisable  to  divide  the  unit  line  into  tenths,  plot 
off  as  many  units  as  possible,  and  state  the  remaining 
portion  (if  any)  as  decimals. 

Let  J.  be  a  line  whose  magnitude  is  required,  and  B 
the  unit  line. 

Divide  B  into  tenths. 


.  A 


Fig.  2. 


It  will  be  seen  that  B  can  be  plotted  3  times  along 
A,  and  the  remaining  portion  of  A  is  equal  to  7  tenths 
of  J5. 

A,  therefore,  represents  3-7  units. 

6.  Addition. — ^Let  it  be  required  to  add  1-7  yds.  to 
1-35  yds. 

Take  any  convenient  scale,  as  V  —  1  yard.  Set  off 
A  B  (Fig.  3)  —  1-7,  and  adjoining  this,  and  in  a  straight 
line  with  it,  set  off  J5  O  =  1-35. 


A  B  .        C 

Fig.  3. 

It  is  now  evident  that  A  C  equals  the  sum  of  ^  ^ 
and  B  C,  and,  by  applying  the  scale  to  it,  it  is  found 
to  be  3-05,  i.e.  the  sum  =  3-05  yds. 

7.  Find  J  he  sum  of  5-4  tons,  4-7  tons,  and  3-2  tons. 

Adopt  a  scale— say  J''  =  1  ton.     Set  oE  A  B,  B  C 


12        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC  STATICS 

and  C  D  (Fig.  4)  in  a  straight  line,  and  equal  to  5-4, 
4-7  and  3-2  respectively.     Then  AD  =  their  sum,  and, 


A  BCD 

Fia.  4. 

if  measured,  will  be  found  to  represent  13-3  tons. 
8.  Subtraction. — Take  42-5  lbs.  from  73  lbs. 


B 


Fig.  5. 


Let  the  scale  be  J^'  =  10  lbs.  Draw  A  B  =  13  lbs. 
(Fig.  5),  and  from  B  set  back  along  B  A,  B  C  =  ^25 
lbs.  A  C  is  now  the  remainder,  and  by  measurement 
this  is  seen  to  represent  30-5  lbs. 

9.  It  should  be  noted  that  all  positive  numbers,  or 
plus  values,  are  set  off  in  one  direction,  usually  from 
left  to  right,  while  the  negative  numbers,  or  minus 
values,  are  measured  back  in  the  opposite  direction. 

10.  Example. — Simplify  (37  —  42  —  3  +  41)  tons. 
Take  a  scale  such  as  f'  =  10  tons. 
Commencing  at  the  point  A,  measure  off  A  B  =  31 

tons  to  the  right,  as  in  Fig.  6.  From  B  mark  off  B  C 
=  42  tons,  but,  since  the  42  tons  are  to  be  subtracted, 
B  C  must  be  taken  in  the  opposite  direction  to  A  B. 
From  G  measure  C  D  =  3  tons.  This  again  being 
negative,  it  must  be  taken  in  the  same  direction  as  B  C. 
From  D  measure  D  E  =:  4:1  tons.  This  being  positive, 
it  must  be  taken  in  the  same  direction  as  A  B. 


D    C       A  £      B 

FiQ.  6. 


GRAPHIC   ARITHMETIC 


13 


The  distance  from  A  to  E  (i.e.  the  first  and  last 
points)  will  give  the  answer.  In  the  example  given  it 
will  be  noticed  that  the  point  E  comes  on  that  side  of 
A  towards  which  the  positive  quantities  were  taken, 
therefore  ^  ^  is  positive.  If  E  had  come  on  the  other 
side  of  A,  then  the  answer  would  have  been  negative. 

II.  Similar  Triangles. — Before  proceeding  to 
multiplication  and  division,  it  is  necessary  to  study 
the  relationship  between  similar  triangles.  Similar 
triangles  are  those  whose  angles  are  equal,  each  to 
each— i.e.,  if  the  two  triangles  ABC  and  DE  F  (Fig.  7) 
be  similar,  the  angle  ^  ^  C  is  equal  to  the  angle  D  E  F  ; 
the  angle  BAG  —  the  angle  E  D  F  ;  and  the  angle 
AC  B  =  the  angle  E  F  D. 


Fig.  7. 

If  two  angles  of  one  triangle  be  equal  to  the  two 
angles  of  another  triangle,  each  to  each,  then,  since 
the  three  angles  of  every  triangle  =  180°,  the  third 
angle  of  the  one  is  equal  to  the  third  angle  of  the  other, 
and  the  triangles  are  similar  in  every  respect. 

The  particular  point  to  be  noted  concerning  similar 
triangles  is  that  the  sides  of  the  one  bear  the  same 
relation  to  each  other  as  do  the  sides  of  the  other  tri- 
angle, each  to  each  ;  that  is,  if  A  B  (Fig.  7)  be  twice 
B  C,  then  D  E  in  twice  E  F  ;  or,  ii  A  C  he  H  times 
A  B,  then  D  F  m  l^  times  D  E. 


14        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


This  comparison  is  true  of  any  two  sides,  providing 
tlie  sides  chosen  in  the  one  triangle  correspond  with 
those  chosen  in  the  other. 

12.  It  is  also  true  if  the  perpendicular  height  be  taken 

D 


0    B 


X  £ 


Fig.  8. 


as  a  side,  because  it  can  easily  be  shown  that  the  tri- 
angle A  0  C  (Fig.  8)  is  similar  to  the  triangle  D  X  F, 
or  that  the  triangle  A  0  B  is  similar  to  the  triangle 
DXE, 

13.  The   relationship   between   the   sides   of   similar 
triangles  is  generally  expressed  as  follows  : — 

^  i?  is  to  ^  C  as  Z)  ^  is  to  ^  J^  (see  Fig.  7),  and 
written  A  B  :  B  C  :  :  D  E  :  E  F. 

But  this  is  proportion,  and  the  product  of  the  ex- 
tremes is  equal  to  the  product  of  the  means  : 
therefore  ABxEF  =  BGxDE, 
BGxDE 


and  AB  =z 


EF 


(Similarly  any  one  side  can  be  found  in  terms  of  the 
others. 

14.  Multiplication,  Division  and  Proportion  can  each 
be  worked  by  means  of  similar  triangles. 

Multiplication. — Let  it  be  required  to  find  a  line 
2-3  times  as  long  as  a  given  line  A. 


GRAPHIC  ARITHMETIC 


15 


Take  a  scale  such  as  V  =  1  unit.     Draw  B  G  =  I 
unit,  and  BD  =  23  units  (Fig.  9). 

r 


I    I    I    I    1    ITI    I    I    I 


JZS 


Scale   of  Uruts 

Fig.  9. 

From  G  erect  a  perpendicular  G  E  equal  to  the  given 
line  A.  Join  BE  and  produce  it  until  it  meets  a 
perpendicular  from  D  at  F. 

Then  D  F  =  2-^  times  G  E  or  2-3  times  as  long  as 
the  given  line  A. 

15.  Division. — Divide  a  given  line  A  by  2-3. 
Draw   a   line   B  G  =  I    unit,    and   5  i>  =  23   units 

(Fig,  10).  From  D  erect  a  perpendicular  Z)  i^  equal  to 
the  given  line  A.  Join  B  F,  and  from  G  erect  the 
perpendicular  C  E,  meeting  it  at  E. 

Then  G  E  represents  the  quotient  of  D  F,ov  A  divided 
by  2-3. 

16.  Proofs. — Suice  the  triangles  EBG  and  FBD 
(Figs.  9  and  10)  have  the  angle  FBD  common  to  both, 
and  the  angle  E  G  B  =  the  angle  F  D  B,  both  being 
right  angles,  then  the  two  triangles  are  similar  in  every 
respect  (§  11). 


16       ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


(zr 


I  I  I  I  I  I 


I_L 


xz:^ 


Scale  oF  Units 

Fig.  10. 

Therefore  D  F  :  B  D  :  :  C  E  :  B  G 

GE  X  BD 
and  i)i^=  TTT^ ,     (1) 


also  G  E 
But  BG 
therefore  D  F  = 


BG 
DF  X  BG 


-.  (2) 


BD 

1  unit  and  jB  D  =  2-3  units, 

0^x23       ^„       ^^ 
-^ =GE  X  2-3, 


and  G  E 


DF  X  1 
2¥~ 


=  DF  -r  2-3. 


17.  Proportion. — It  should  be  noticed  that  multipH- 
cation  and  division  are  simply  proportions  where  one 
of  the  quantities  of  the  known  ratio  is  unity. 

The  equations  1  and  2  are  true  whatever  values  are 
given  to  ^  O  and  B  D,  provided  that  they  are  properly 
set  out  to  scale,  so  the  construction  for  a  problem  in 
proportion  is  similar  to  that  for  multiplication  and 
division. 


GRAPHIC   ARITHMETIC 


17 


Notes  : — 

\.  B  C  and  B  D  must  be  drawn  to  the  same  scale. 

2.  DF  must  be  measured  by  the  same  scale  as 

that  by  which  C  E  is  drawn,  and  vice  versa. 

3.  C  E  (Fig.  9)  and  D  F  (Fig.  10)  were  each  drawn 

equal  to  a  given  line,  but  they  could  have  been 
drawn  to  scale  equal  to  any  known  quantity. 

4.  A  different  scale  may  be  used  for  B  C  and  B  D 

to  that  used  for  C  E  and  D  F. 

5.  The     perpendicular    representing     the     known 

quantity  must  be  erected  at  the  end  of  the 
line  shown  in  the  denominator  of  the  equations 
1  and  2. 
1 8.  Examples. — Multiply  350  lbs.  by  1-7. 
Let  the  scale  for  the  multiplicand  be  f'  =  100  lbs., 
and  the  scale  for  the  multiplier  be  2'"  =  1  unit. 

By  the  second  scale  set  off  ^  ^  =  1  unit,  and  A  G 
=  1-7  units  (Fig.  11).  £ 


Fig.  11. 


18 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC   STATICS 


b'roni  B  draw  the  perpendicular  B  D  =  350  lbs.  by 
the  first  scale. 

Join  A  D,  and  produce  it  to  meet  the  perpendicular 
C  E.  By  applying  the  first  scale,  C  E  will  be  found  to 
represent  595  lbs. 

19.  Find  the  product  of  the  lines  A  and  B  if  the  line 
C  be  the  unit. 

Draw  DE  =  C,  Sind  DF  =  B  (Fig.  12). 


At  E  erect  the  perpendicular  E  G  =  A.  Join  D  G, 
and  produce  it  to  meet  the  perpendicular  F  H  at  //, 

Then  F  H  is  the  product  of  A  and  B. 

N.B. — The  result  would  have  been  the  same  \i  D  F 
were  made  equal  to  A,  and  E  G  equal  to  B. 

20.  Divide  42-5  yards  by  3-4. 

Make  A  B  and  A  C  equal  to  1  and  3-4  units  respec- 
tively.    At  C  set  up  O  Z)  equal  to  42-5  yards  by  scale. 

Join  A  D  and  erect  the  perpendicular  BE.  BE 
measured  to  scale  gives  12-5  yards. 

21.  Find  five-sevenths  of  a  given  line.  This  may 
be  stated  as  a  proportion,  thus  : 


GRAPHIC    ARITHMETIC 


19 


^ivou  line  :  required  part. 

given  line  x 


therefore  the  required  part  = 

Taking  a  suitable  scale,  make  Q 

AB  =  5^ndAC  =  7  (Fig.  14). 
7  is  the  denominator  in  the 
above  equation,  and  it  is  repre- 
sented by  A  C.  Therefore  from 
G  erect  the  perpendicular  C  D 
equal  to  the   given  line.      Join 

A  D,  and  from  B  erect  the  per-  on 

pendicular  B  E  meeting  it  at  ^.    A  D       0 

Then  BE  =  fCD.  ^'^-  ^^^ 

22.  If  a  rod  of  iron  3-2  yds.  long  weighs  12-6  lbs. 
what  would  be  its  weight  if  it  were  7-5  yds.  long  ? 

The  proportion  is  3-2  yds.  :  7-5  yds.  :  :  12-6   lbs.  : 
X  lbs. 

12-6  lbs.  X  7-5 
therefore  x  = ^ • 

Draw  ^  J5  and  ^  C  (Fig.  15)  equal  to  3-2  yds.  and 

E 


20 


30 


UO 


SO 


bo 


10 


nil 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

\   / 

W             0 

i 

2 

J 

U 

5 

(9 

7 

lllllllllll 

1 

1 

1 

1 

I 

1 

h 

Scales 
Fia.  15. 


yd6 


20        ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


7-5  yds.  respectively.     From  B  erect  the  perpendicular 

5  Z)  =  12-6  lbs.     Join  A  D,   and  produce  it  until  it 

meets  the  perpendicular  C E.     Then  C E  =  295  lbs. 

23.  The  preceding  examples,   18  to  22,  could  have 

been  solved  equally  well  by  using  another  diagram. 

12-6  lbs.  X  7-5 
In  the  last  exercise  x  = ~ 

Draw  A  B  Sind  AC  (Fig.   16)  equal  to  3-2  and  7-5 
respectively. 

At  A  erect  the  perpendicular  A  D  equal    to   12-6 
lbs. 

Since  A  B  represents  the 
denominator  in  the  above 
equation,  join  B  to  D. 

From  C  draw  C  E  parallel 
to  B  D  until  it  meets  the 
perpendicular  from  A  at  E. 

Then  A  E  =  x  =  29-5 
lbs. 


A 


Examples  to  Chapter  I. 


Ex.  Ch.  I.— Fig.   1. 


^B 


1.  What  does  A  B  (Fig.  1)  show  :— 

(a)  With  a  scale  of  J''  =  1  unit. 

(b)  With  a  scale  of  f ''  =  1  yard. 

(c)  With  a  scale  of  f  =  1  ton. 
{d)  With  a  scale  of -//  =  1000  lbs. 

2.  Taking  a  convenient  scale,  graphically  determine 
the  following  : — 

(a)  The  diagonal  of  a  square  whose  sides  are  36  ft. 


EXAMPLES    TO   CHAPTER    I 


21 


(6)  The    perpendicular    height    of    an    equilateral 

triangle  with  15''  sides, 
(c)  The  height  of  a  wall,  if  a  24  ft.  ladder  leaning 

against  it,  with  the  foot  7-5  ft.  from  the  wall, 

just  reaches  the  top. 
{d)  The  length  of  the  different  members  in  Fig.  2. 


<-  -  -      26.0'    -  -  ^ 

Ex.  Ch.  I.— Fig.  2. 

3.  Draw  a  line  2''  long,  and  find  |.  of  it. 

4.  Find  the  sum  of  A  and  B  (Fig.  3)  if  the  unit  line 
measures  J". 

5.  Find  the  product  of  A 
and  B  (Fig.  3)  if  J''  =  1  unit. 

6.  Draw  two  lines,  A  2-3 
inches  long,  and  B  15  inches 
long. 

If  the  scale  be  J''  =  1   unit,  graphically  determine 


A 
B 


Ex.  Ch.  I.— Fig.  3. 


^+B. 


Chapter  II 
FORCE 

24.  Force  is  (a)  that  which  tends  to  move  a  body, 

or  (6)  that  which  tends  to  stop  a  body 

when  it  is  moving, 

or  (c)  that   which    tends   to   change    the 

direction  of  a  body  when  it  is  moving. 

In  this  work  it  is  only  intended  to  deal  with  force  as 

defined  in  (a).    No  reference  will  be  made  to  velocity,  and 

only  bodies  which  are  in  a  state  of  rest  relatively  to 

neighbouring  bodies  will  be  treated  upon, 

25.  Force  is  measured  in  units  of  lbs.,  cwts.,  or  tons. 

26.  We  have  already  seen  that  lbs.,  etc.,  can  be  repre- 
sented by  lines  drawn  to  scale.  Hence,  if  the  magni- 
tude of  a  force  be  known,  a  line  may  be  drawn  whose 
length  will  be  proportional  to  the  force. 

27.  Force  must  be  exerted  in  a  certain  direction  ; 
the  line  representing  it  must,  therefore,  be  drawn  in  that 
direction. 

28.  An  arrow  can  be  placed  on  the  line  indicating 
the  sense  of  the  force,  that  is,  showing  in  which  direction 
along  the  line  the  force  is  acting. 
^^ Example. — If    V   —    10 

lbs.,  then  A  represents  a 
forc(^=  32  lbs.  acting  from 
left  to  right,  and  B  a 
downward  force  =  15  lbs. 
29.  The  j)oint  of  appli- 
cation   (i.e.   the    place   at 


B 


Example. 
which  the  force  is  applied)  must  be  known. 


RESULTANT — EQUILIBRIUM — EQUILIBR^VNT  23 

30.  When  the  magnitude,  direction,  sense,  and  point 
of  apphcation  of  a  force  are  known,  the  force  is  said  to 
be  known. 

These  four  points  should  be  clearly  understood,  and 
always  kept  in  mind.  In  determining  a  force  the 
student  must  see  that  he  finds  all  four. 

31.  Resultant. — If  a  number  of  forces  (whether 
parallel  or  otherwise)  act  on  a  body,  and  move  it  in  a 
certain  direction,  it  is  evident  that  another  force  could 
be  found,  which,  acting  in  that  direction,  would  do 
the  same  work. 

This  force  is  called  the  resultant  of  the  others. 

32.  Equilibrium. — If  the  resultant  of  a  number  of 
forces  be  zero,  then  they  are  said  to  be  in  equilibrium. 
If  thes3  forces  be  applied  to  a  body  in  a  state  of  rest, 
then  it  will  still  remain  -at  rest. 

33.  Equilibrant. — When  a  body  is  not  in  equilib- 
rium it  moves  in  a  certain  direction  with  a  force  which 
has  a  resultant.  Another  force  equal  to  the  resultant 
in  magnitude,  acting  in  the  same  line  and  opposite  in 
sense,  would  produce  equilibrium. 

This  force  is  called  the  equilibrant. 

34.  The  equilibrant  and  the  resultant  of  a  system  of 
forces  are  always  equal  in  magnitude,  act  in  the  same 
line  of  direction,  and  are  of  opposite  sense. 

Note. — By  old  writers  the  word  direction  meant  line 
of  action  and  sense  together,  and  in  common  language 
direction  is  still  used  in  this  way. 

35.  If  a  number  of  forces  be  in  equilibrium,  any  one 
of  them  is  the  equilibrant  of  the  others,  and  if  the  sense 
be  reversed,  it  will  represent  their  resultant. 

For,  if  a  system  of  forces  be  in  equilibrium,  each  force 
helps  to  maintain  it,  and  the  removal  of  any  one  of  them 


24        ELEMENTARY    PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

would  cause  the  remainder  to  move  along  the  line  on 
which  it  was  acting,  and  in  the  opposite  direction. 

36.  Parallel  Forces. — Forces  are  said  to  be  parallel 
when  the  lines  along  which  they  act  are  parallel. 

Suppose  forces  equal  to  5,  3,  and  8  lbs.  to  be  acting  in 
one  direction,  and  forces  equal  to  4,  7,  and  2  lbs.  in  the 
opposite  direction.  In  the  one  direction  a  force  equal 
to  16  lbs.  would  be  acting,  whilst  against  that  a  force 
equal  to  13  lbs.  would  be  exerted.  The  whole  system 
will  have  a  resultant  of  3  lbs.  acting  in  the  first  direction. 
The  3  lbs.  represents  the  resultant  of  the  6  forces,  and 
acts  in  the  direction  of  the  16  lbs. 

If  a  force  equal  to  3  lbs.  be  added  to  the  second  set 
of  forces,  or  taken  from  the  first,  then  the  whole  system 
would  be  in  equilibrium. 

37.  In  dealing  with  parallel  forces  those  acting  in 
one  direction  are  taken  as  positive,  and  those  acting 
in  the  opposite  direction  as  negative.  The  algebraical 
sum  of  all  the  forces  will  represent  the  resultant,  and 
it  will  act  in  the  direction  of  those  whose  sum  is  the 
greater. 

38.  If  this  sum  be  zero,  then  all  the  forces 
g  are     in     equilibrium,     and,     conversely,    if    a 

system  of    parallel  forces    be    in    equilibrium, 
then  the  algebraical  sum  =  0. 

Fig.  17  represents  a  force  A  B  acting  on  a 
point  A.  If  only  this  force  were  acting  on  it, 
it  would  move  in  the  direction  of  A  to  B,  and 
to  keep  it  in  equilibrium,  another  force  A  C 
equal  to  A  B,  and  pulling  it  in  the  opposite 
direction,   must   be  introduced. 

Figs.  18  and  19  show  how  by  means  of  two 


A 


C 


Fig.  17.     spring    balances  the    student  can  prove    for 


EEACTION — MOMENTS 


25 


QQ 


u 


f 


Fig.    1! 


I 


KS 


5 


I 


bal- 


himself  that  the  sum  of  all  the  forces  acting 
downwards  is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  forces 
supporting  them.  Of  course,  the  weight  of 
the  pulley  (Fig.  18)  or  the  bar  (Fig.  19)  must 
be  added,   as  it 

exerts    a  down-        5?  X 

ward  pressure. 
Fig.  20  repre- 
sents a  beam 
carrying  three 
loads.  On  ex- 
amination it 
will  be  seen  that 

the   two  walls  act  in  just   the   same  way  as  the 

ances   in  Fig.  19.      Hence 

the  force  exerted   by  the 

two  walls    together    must 

equal  the  sum  of    all  the 

forces    acting    downwards, 

together  with  the  weight  of 

the  beam, 

39.  Reaction. — When  a  force  acts  on  a  body  it 
produces  a  resisting  force  from  that  body.  This  second 
force  is  always  equal  to  and  opposite  to  the  first. 

The  beam  with  its  load  (Fig.  20)  exerts  a  force  on 
the  walls,  and  this  produces  a  resistance  from  each 
wall  equal  to  the  portion  of  the  weight  it  has  to  carry. 
These  resistances  are  called  the  reactions  of  the  wall. 

40.  Moments. — It  now  becomes  necessary  to  ascer- 
tain why  the  point  of  application  of  a  force  should  be 
known.  Place  a  book  or  similar  object  at  A  B  C  D 
(Fig.  21)  on  a  table.  Apply  a  force,  as  shown  at  P. 
This  will  cause  the  book  to  rotate  clockwise,   i.e.   in 


Fig.   19. 


^        I        ^ 


I 


Fig.  20. 


26        ELEMENTAliY   TIUNCIPLES   OF   GUAPHIC   STATICS 

the  same  direction  as  the  hands  of  a  clock.  If  the 
force  be  appUed  near  A,  it  will  rotate  in  the  opposite 
direction,  or  anti-clockwise.  By  applying  the  force  at 
different  points,  the  student  will  find  that  to  move 
the  book  forward  he  must  apply  a  force  in  a  direction 
which,  if  produced,  would  pass  through  the  point  G. 

Again,  let  him  take  a  lath,  holding  it  horizontally 
by  one  end.  Place  a  1  lb.  weight  1  ft.  from  the  hand. 
He  will  find  that  the  weight  causes  the  lath  to  try  to 
rotate  with  his  hand  as  the  centre  of  rotation,  and  he 
also  experiences  a  difficulty  in  counteracting  this  rota- 
iP  tion.  If  he  moves  the  weight 
2  ft.  from  the  hand,  he  will 
find  the  tendency  to  rotate 
twice  as  great,  and  that  it  is 
twice  as  difficult  to  keep  the 
weight  in  position. 
Fig.  21.  ^j^  From  this  it  will  be  seen 

that  the  greater  the  distance  the  weight  or  force  is 
from  a  certain  point,  the  greater  is  its  tendency  to 
produce  rotation  round  that  point. 

42.  This  tendency  of  a  force  to  produce  rotation  is 
called  the  Moment  of  the  force,  or  Bending  Moment. 

43.  If  a  force  passes  through  the  point  chosen,  and 
the  point  is  supported,  the  force  cannot  produce  rota- 
tion, hence  there  is  no  Moment.  It  acts  simply  as  a 
force. 

44.  Referring  again  to  the  weight  supported  on  the 
lath  2  ft.  from  the  hand,  it  is  wrong  to  say  that  the 
strain  on  the  hand  is  2  lbs.  because  only  1  lb.  is  sup- 
ported. How,  then,  shall  the  moment  be  measured  ? 
It  is  now  clear  that  it  will  depend  directly  upon  the 
magnitude  of  the  force,   and  upon  the  perpendicular 


MOMENTS  27 

distance  of  the  line  of  action  of  tlie  force  from  the 
point  on  which  it  is  supposed  to  rotate. 

Hence,  in  the  last  example  the  strain  on  the  hand 
is  1  lb.   X  2  ft.  =  2  ft.-lbs. 

As  before  explained,  the  unit  of  force  is  generally 
expressed  in  lbs.,  cwts.,  or  tons,  and  the  unit  of  length 
in  inches  or  feet,  so  the  moment  of  a  force  would  be 
expressed   as  —  inch-lbs.,   ft.-lbs.,   ft.-cwts.,   etc. 

45.  The  moment  of  a  force  which  produces  clock- 
wise rotation  is  generally  taken  as  negative,  and  that 
producing  rotation  in  the  opposite  direction  as  positive. 

We  will  now  proceed  to  find 


lbs  Ih. 


the  moments    in    an  example.  a^^l  {if 

The   student   should  again  use  |-  '^  ^   | 

his  spring-balances,  and  arrange    Y     /\  /^^    -S 

them  as  in  Fig.  22.     To  prevent  '^(3 

the  arrangement  being  cumber- 
some, he  can  take  an  inch  for  his  unit  of  length  and 
mark  off  the  inches  on  the  bar. 

In  the  example  shown  the  bar  is  8"',  and  the  weight, 
which  is  6  lbs.,  is  shown  3"'  from  one  end.  The  balance 
nearer  the  weight  now  registers  3|  lbs.,  and  the  other 
21  lbs. 

The  system  shows  three  parallel  forces  in  equilibrium, 
and  the  force  acting  downwards  is  equal  to  the  sum 
of  those  acting  m  the  opposite  direction. 

Any  point  can  now  be  selected,  and  the  moments  of 
all  the  forces  about  that  point  ascertained,  care  being 
taken  to  prefix  the  +  (plus)  or  —  (minus)  signs,  as 
already  explained. 

First  let  the  centre  of  the  beam  be  taken  as  the  point. 

This  must  now  be  considered  as  a  pivot  on  which 
the  beam  can  turn. 


28        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF  GRAPHIC   STATICS 

The  6  lbs.  would  cause  it  to  turn  clockwise,  and  is 
V  from  the  point,  so  the  moment  is  —  6  inch-lbs. 

The  3|  lbs.  would  cause  it  to  revolve  in  the  opposite 
direction,  and  is  4^'  from  the  point,  so  the  moment  is 
+  15  inch-lbs. 

The  2J  lbs.  is  4''  away,  and  would  cause  clockwise 
motion,  so  the  moment  is  —  9  inch-lbs. 

The  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  all  the  forces 
about  this  point  is  (  —  6  + 15  —  9)  inch-lbs.  =  o. 

Take  the  point  y  2"'  from  A  as  shown  (Fig.  15). 

The  moments  are  +  (21  lbs.  x  2'')  -  (6  lbs.  x  T) 
+  (3|  lbs.  X  W)  =  (41  -  42  +  37i)  in.-lbs.  =  o. 

Lastly,  take  a  point  through  which  one  of  the  forces 
acts.  Then  by  §  43  the  moment  of  that  force  is  nil. 
Taking  the  point  B,  the  only  forces  producing  rotation 
are  the  2 J  lbs.  and  the  6  lbs. 

The  moments  are  (2 J  x  8  —  6x3)  in.  lbs.  = 
(18-18)  in.  lbs.  =  o. 

46.  From  the  foregoing  example  it  will  be  seen  that — 
If  a  system  of  forces  be  in  equilibrium,  the  algebraical 

sum  of  the  moments  of  all  the  forces  about  any  point 
is  zero. 

47.  The  converse  of  this  is  also  true,  so — 

If  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  all  the  forces 
in  a  system  be  zero,  then  the  system  is  in  equilibrium. 

48.  Further — 

The  moment  of  the  resultant  of  any  number  of  forces 
about  any  point  is  equal  to  the  algebraical  sum  of  the 
moments  of  all  those  forces  about  the  same  point. 

For,  taking  Fig.  22,  the  force  at  A  may  be  considered 
the  equilibrant  of  the  other  two,  and,  if  the  sense  be 
reversed,  it  will  represent  the  resultant  of  the  same 
two,  (§  35). 


MOMENTS 


29 


Take  the  moments  about  the  centre. 

The  force  at  A  now  acts  downwards,  so  the  moment 
of  this  force  is  2^  lbs.  x  4"'  =  +  9  in. -lbs. 

The  moments  of  the  other  two  forces  are  (15  —  6) 
in. -lbs.  =  +  9  in.-lbs. 

49.  If,  then,  it  be  necessary  to  find  the  moments 
of  a  number  of  forces  about  a  point,  it  is  sufficient  to 
find  the  moment  of  the  resultant  of  those  forces  about 
that  point. 

50.  The  knowledge  we  have  gained  of  these  moments 
is  of  great  assistance  in  determining  forces. 

Fig.  23  represents  a  beam  rest- 
ing on  two  walls,  A  and  B,  12  ft. 
apart,  and  carrying  a  load  of  6 
tons  4  ft.  from  B. 

It  is  necessary  to  find  what 
portion  of  the  load  each  wall 
carries. 

The  reactions  of  ^  +  B  z=  6  tons. 

There  are  two  unknown  forces,  so  we  will  take  the 
moments  about  the  point  B  to  eliminate  the  moment 
of  that  force  (§  43). 

Let  ^'s  share  of  the  load  be  called  x  tons. 

Then  6  tons  x  4'  -  a:  tons  x  12'  =  o  (§  46) 


,  tons 


»^ 


^- 


■*(-L0 


Fig.   23. 


fore  X  tons  x  12'  =  6  tons  x  4',  and  x  tons  : 

=  2  tons  =  ^'s    share.    But  A+  B  =  Q 
fore  -B's  portion  is  4  tons. 

51.  The  student  will  recognize  x  tons  = 


there- 
6  tons  X  4' 

""     r2^ 

tons  ;  there- 

6  tons  X  4  ft. 
12  ft. 


I 


as  a  proportion  (§  13),  hence  x  may  be  found  graphically. 
In  the   above  expression   there  are  feet   and  tons, 
hence  two  different  scales  are  necessary,  the  one  to  set 


30 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


out  the  length  of  the  beam  and  the  position  of  the  load, 
and  the  other  by  which  to  draw  the  magnitude  of  the 
load. 

The  former  is  an  ordinary  lineal  scale,  and  the  latter 
is  known  as  the  force  scale. 

Set  out  the  beam  to  scale  (say  ^  =  V),  and  mark 
the  position  of  the  load  (Fig.  24). 

To  find  ^'s  load,  set  up  at  A  the  perpendicular 
A  D  =  6  tons  by  scale  (say  J"'  =  1  ton). 

Join  B  D,  and  erect  the  perpendicular  C  E  to  meet  it. 


Fig.  24. 


Then  C  E=  x  (§  13)=J's  load  drawn  to  scale  =  2  tons. 

To  find  i?'s  load,  draw  from  E  the  line  E  F  parallel 
to  A  B.  Since  A  F  =  C  E  =  A'^  load,  and  AD  =  Q 
tons,  therefore  F  D  =  B's  load  =  4  tons. 

52.  Fig.  25  represents  a  beam  supporting  two  loads. 

Find  the  reactions  of  the  supports. 

Let  A  again  =  x  tons,  and  take  the  moments  about  B. 

Then  4  tons  x  8  ft.  +  5  tons  x  12  ft.  —  x  tons 
X  18  ft.  =  0, 


TAEAT.LEL    FORCES 


31 


)  I  tons         4  I 


tons 


6'o" 


-L.0-  ^ 
Fig.  25. 


i.O 


so  X  tons  X  18  ft.  —  (32  +  60)  ft.-tons, 


and  X  tons  = 


(32  +  60)  ft.-tons 


Therefore  B's  load 


18  ft. 

=  9  tons 


A's  load. 


5.V  tons  =  3#  tons. 


To  find  these  reactions,  as  shown  in  Fig.  24,  would 
necessitate  two  figures  and  the  answers  added  together. 
In  Chapter  V  a  better  method  will  be  shown  for  graphi- 
cally finding  the  reactions  when  there  is  more  than  one 
load. 

53.  If  the  beam  carries  a  uniformly  distributed  load 
over  its  whole  length,  then  each  support  carries  one- 
half  the  total  load. 

54.  To  ascertain  this  arithmetically  or  graphically 
the  whole  load  must  be  considered  as  concentrated 
at  its  centre  of  gravity,  which  will  be  over  the  centre 
of  the  beam. 

55.  If  the  load  be  uniformly  distributed  over  a 
portion  of  the  length  of  the  beam,  the  load  must  be 
treated  as  acting  at  its  centre  of  gravity. 

56.  Point  of  Application  of  the  Resultant  of 
Parallel  Forces. — It  was  pointed  out  (in  §  31)  that 
the  resultant  of  a  number  of  forces  is  the  force  which 
can  be  substituted  for  them,  and,  in  the  case  of  parallel 
forces,  it  is  equal  to  their  algebraical  sum. 

It  is  now  necessary  to  find  the  point  of  application 


32         ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

of  the  resultant,  that  is,  a  point  in  the  line  along  wliich 
the  resultant  would  act  to  do  the  same  work  as  the 
forces  for  which  it  is  substituted. 

Since  the  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  all  the 
forces  about  a  point  is  equal  to  the  moment  of  the 
resultant  about  the  same  point  (§  48),  and  the  moment 
of  the  resultant  about  the  point  through  which  it 
acts  is  zero  (§  43),  then  the  algebraical  sum  of  the 
moments  of  all  the  other  forces  about  that  point  is 
zero. 

57.  First  Case.  To  find  the  point  of  application 
of  the  resultant  of  two  forces  when  they  act  in  opposite 
directions. 

Let  two  forces,  A  and 
B,  of  which  B  is  the 
greater,  act  in  opposite 
directions. 

Draw  a    line  m  n    per- 
pendicular to  their  lines  of 
action,  and  meeting  them  at  x  and  y  (Fig.  26). 

It  is  now  necessary  to  find  a  point  in  mn  such  that 
the  algebraical  sum  of  the  moments  of  A  and  B  about 
that  point  will  be  zero. 

An  examination  of  the  figure  will  show  that  the 
point  cannot  be  between  x  and  y  because  the  two  forces 
would  cause  rotation  in  the  same  direction  about  any 
point  in  x  y. 

Take  any  point  0  outside  the  smaller  force. 

If  this  be  the  point,  then  A.o  x  =  B.o  y. 

But  A  is  less  than  B,  and  o  a;  is  less  than  o  y,  and  the 
product  of  two  smaller  quantities  cannot  be  equal  to 
the  product  of  two  greater  ones. 

Hence,  the   required  point   cannot   be   outside   the 


A 

6 

(n   0 

X         y      p    n 

Fig.  26. 

PAKALLEL    FORCES 


33 


I 


smaller  force.  It  must  therefore  be  outside  the  greater 
force,  and,  if  p  be  the  point,  will  be  such  that  ^.py  = 
A.px.     By  §  37  the  resultant  is  equal  to  B—A. 

Example. — If  two  forces  equal  to  9  lbs.  and  4  lbs. 
act  in  opposite  directions,  find  the  resultant  force  and 
its  point  of  application  when  the  distance  between  the 
forces  is  5  ft. 
Adopt  a  lineal  and  a  force  scale. 
Draw    any  line  xy  per- 
pendicular  to  the  lines   of 
action  of   the   forces   (Fig. 
27). 

Let  A  be  the  point  where 
the  smaller  force  would  meet 
it,  and  B  the  point  of  inter- 
section of  the  greater,  5  ft.  from  it. 

From  A  erect  a  perpendicular  A  C  =  9  lbs.,  and 
from  B,  BD  =  4  lbs. 

Join  C  D  and  produce  it  to  meet  xy  in  0. 
Then  0  is  a   point  in   the  line  of  action  of  the  re- 
sultant. 

The  resultant  force  is  (9—  4)  lbs.  =5  lbs.,  and  it  acts 
in  the  same  direction  as  the  9  lbs. 

Proo/.— The  triangles  C  AO  and  D  BO  are  similar. 
Therefore  C  A  :  A  0  :  :  D  B  :  B  0 
and  0  ^  xBO  =  DBxAO. 
But  O ^  =:  9  lbs.,  siYid  DB  =  5  lbs., 
therefore  9  lbs.  x  BO  =  5  lbs.  x  A  0. 
The  distance  of  0  from  either  A  or  B  can  be  obtained 
by  applying  the  lineal  scale. 

58.  Second  Case.  To  find  the  point  of  application 
of  the  resultant  of  two  forces  when  they  act  in  the 
same  direction. 


34        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

Let  two  forces,  A  and  B,  of  whicli  B  is  the  greater, 
act  in  the  same  direction. 

Draw  a  line  m  n  perpendicular  to  their  lines  of  action, 
and  meeting  them  at  x  and  y  (Fig.  28). 

Suppose  a  point  to  be  taken  to  the  left  of  A . 
The  forces  A  and  B  would  cause  rotation  in  the  same 
direction  around  this  point,  hence  the  algebraical  sum 
of  their  moments  cannot  be  zero. 

The  resultant,  therefore,  cannot  be  to  the  left  of  A. 
Similarly  it  cannot  act  to  the  right  of  B. 

It  must  therefore   act  be- 
tween A  and  B. 
Q  Suppose   it    acts    through 

the  point  o. 
Then  A.  o  x  —  B.  o  y  =  o, 


m  X         0   y  n       smd  A.o  x  =  B.oy. 

-p       .^g  But  B  was  taken   greater 

than  A ,  therefore  o  y  must 
be  less  than  o  x,  that  is,  the  point  o  must  be  nearer 
the  greater  force. 

59.  Hence,  if  two  forces  act  in  the  same  direction, 
the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant  is  between  them,  and 
nearer  the  greater  force,  and  by  §  37  the  resultant 
is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  two. 

60.  If  the  two  forces  be  equal,  the  line  of  action  of 
the  resultant  will  be  midway  between  them. 

61.  If  the  point  of  application  of  one  force  be  joined 
to  that  of  another  like  force,  the  resultant  must  pass 
through  the  line  joining  them. 

62.  Example. — Two  parallel  forces  equal  to  7  lbs. 
and  9  lbs.  are  8  ft.  apart,  and  act  in  the  same  direction. 

Find  the  magnitude  of  the  resultant  and  where  it  acts. 


PARALLEL    FORCES 


35 


two  scales — say,  lineal  scale  J''  =  1  ft. 
and  force  scale  t''  =  1  lb. 


D 


Draw  any  line  x  y  crossing  their  lines  of  action  at 
right  angles. 

Let  A  (Fig.  29)  be  a  point  in  the  line  of  action  of  the 
smaller  force,  and  at  this  point  erect  the  perpendicular 
A  C  equal  to  9  lbs. 

Let  J5  be  a  point  8  ft.  from  it  in  the  line  of  action  of 
the  larger  force,  and  from  B  erect  the  perpendicular 
B  D  equal  to  7  lbs. 

(Note  the  perpendiculars  are  drawn  inversely  to  the 
magnitude  of  the  forces.) 

Join  A  D  and  B  C,  then  the  point  o  where  these  lines 
intersect  is  a  point  in  the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant. 

Through  o  draw  the  perpendicular  m  n. 

Then  m  n  represents  the  resultant,  whose  magnitude 
is  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  forces  16  lbs.,  whose  line  of 
action  is  through  o,  and  which  acts  in  the  same  direction 
as  the  otlier  two  forces. 

Proof. — Draw  por  parallel  to  x  y. 

The  triangles  AoG  and  D  o  B  are  similar, 


36        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

therefore  A  C  :  o  p  :  :  B  D  :  o  r 
and  AC  x  or  =  B  D  x  op. 
But  ^  C  =  9  lbs.,  SindBD  =  l  lbs. 
Therefore  9  lbs.  x  o  r  =  7  lbs.  x  o  p, 
or  9  lbs.  x  o  r  —  7  lbs.  x  o  p  =  o. 

Levers. 

to'  (b)  (c) 

Fig.  30. 

63.  Fig.  30  represents  the  three  orders  of  levers  (a) 
being  the  first  order,  (h)  the  second,  and  (c)  the  third 
order.  In  each  case  W  means  the  weight  or  resistance, 
P  the  power,  and  F  the  fulcrum. 

The  distance  from  the  fulcrum  (F)  to  the  weight  {W) 
is  called  the  "  weight  arm,"  and  the  distance  from  the 
fulcrum  to  the  power  (P)  is  called  the  "  power  arm." 

64.  To  solve  problems  on  the  lever  arithmetically 
the  moments  of  W  and  P  about  F  are  taken. 

The  moment  of  W  about  F  =  the  moment  of  P 
about  F, 

therefore  W  x  the  weight  arm  =  P  x  the  power  arm, 
P  X  power  arm 


and     W  = 
and     P  = 


weight  arm      ' 
W  X  weight  arm 


power  arm 

,                              weight  arm  x  W 
and     power  arm  = 

power  arm  x  P 

and     weight  arm  =— — 


W 


i 


LEVERS 


37 


65.  It  will  be  noticed  that  the  equations  are  similar 
to  those  used  for  graphically  working  proportions, 
therefore  problems  on  the  lever  may  be  similarly  solved. 

Let  B  C  (Fig.  31)  be  a  lever  of         r 
the  first  order,  with  ^  ^  as  the 
weight  arm,  and  A  G  the  power 
arm. 

(a)  To  find  the  weight, 
draw  the  perpendicular 
B  D,  equal  to  the  power, 
at  the  end  of  the  weight 
arm,  and  join  A  D.  From 
C  draw  G  E  parallel  to 
A  D  and  meeting  the  per- 
pendicula;r  A  E  3i>t  E.  Fig.  31. 

Then  A  E  is  the  required  weight  drawn  to  scale. 

(6)  To  find  the  power,  draw  the  perpendicular  A  E 
equal  to  the  weight  at  the  end  of  the  power  arm,  and 
join  G  E.  From  A  draw  A  D  parallel  to  G  E  until  it 
cuts  the  perpendicular  from  B  at  D. 

Then  B  D  =  the  power. 

(c)  To  find  the  power  arm,  draw  the  per- 
pendiculars B  D  and  A  E  equal  to  the  power 
and  weight  respectively.  Join  DA.  From 
E  draw  the  line  E  G  parallel  to  D  A.  The 
interception  of  the  line  E  G  with 
the  lever  determines  the  length 
of  the  power  arm. 

{d)  In  order  to  find  the 
weight  arm,  the  diagram  is 
modified  a  little,  as  shown 
in  Fig.  32. 

The  weight  is  set  up  from  Fig.  32. 


38 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC    STATICS 


G  instead  of  from  A,  and  the  power  from  A  instead 
of    from    B.     The  line    DB   being   drawn   parallel   to 
A  E   determines   the   length   of    A  B.     The   power   or 
weight  can  also  be  found  with  this  diagram. 
Proofs  for  (a),  (6),  and  (c) — 

The  triangles  AB  D  and  C  AE  (Fig.  31)  are  similar, 

therefore  D  B  :  A  B  :  :  A  E  :  A  C, 

and  DBxAC  =  EAxAB: 

i.e.  W  X  weight  arm  =  P  x  power  arm. 


Fig.  33. 


Fig.   34. 


{(l)   can  be  similarly  proved. 

66.  Second  and  Third  Order  of  Levers. 

Suppose  A  B  and  A  C  (Figs.  33  or  34)  to  represent 
the  power  arm  and  the  weight  arm  respectively  of  a 
lever  of  the  Second  Order  (or  Third  Order). 

(a)  To  find  the  weight,  draw  the  perpendicular  A  D 
equal  to  the  power.  Join  C  D,  and  from  B  draw  B  E 
parallel  toG  D  until  it  intercepts  the  perpendicular  A  E. 

Then  AE  =  thG  weight. 

(6)  To  find  the  power,  draw  the  perpendicular  A  E 
equal  to  the  weight.  Join  B  E,  and  from  G  draw  G  D 
parallel  to  B  E. 

Then  A  E  =  the  power. 


LEVERS 


39 


(c)  To  find  the  power  arm,  set  up  A  D  equal  to  the 
power,  and  A  E  equal  to  the  weight.^^  Join  C  D  and 
draw  E  B  parallel  to  C  D.  The  point  where  E  B  inter- 
cepts the  lever  is  the  end  of  the  power  arm. 

{d)  To  find  the  weight  arm,  set  up  ^  D  and  yl  ^  as 
before.  Join  B  E.  From  D  draw  D  C  parallel  to  B  E. 
The  point  C  is  the  position  of  the  weight,  and  ^  O  is 
the  weight  arm. 

67.  The  "  weight  "  and  "  power  "  in  the  First  Order 
of  levers  form  a  good  illustration  of  "  like  parallel 
forces  "  (§  58),  the  point  of  application  of  the  resultant 
being  at  the  fulcrum. 

Since  the  lever  is  in  equilibrium,  the  resultant  must 
be  balanced  by  an  equal  and  opposite  force.  This 
second  force  is  the  reaction  of  the  fulcrum,  and  is  equal 
to  the  sum  of  the  weight  and  power. 

Similarly  the  second  and  third  orders  of  levers  illus- 
trate "  unlike  parallel  forces  "  (§  57),  the  reaction  of 
the  fulcrum  again  being  equal  and  opposite  to  the 
resultant  of  the  two  forces. 


Fig.  .35. 
68.  It  will  be  seen  by  Fig.   35  that  a  cantilever  is 


40        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


a  lever  of  the  first  order,  the  fulcrum  {F)  being  the 
point  on  which  the  lever  tends  to  turn.  The  power 
(P)  is  supplied  by  the  weight  of  the  wall  built  on  the 
lever. 

69.  A  beam  supported  at  both  ends  is  a  lever  of  the 
second  order. 

Either  end  may  be  considered  as  the  fulcrum,  if  the 
other  be  treated  as  the  power. 


Fig.  36. 

70.  Levers  need  not  necessarily  be  straight  bars. 
They  may  be  curved,  as  in  Fig.  36  {a),  cranked  as  in 
Fig.  36  (c),  {d)  and  (e),  or  of  any  other  form.  The 
only  essential  point  is  that  they  should  be  rigid. 

71.  The  "  effective  leverage  "  is  the  perpendicular 
distance  from  the  fulcrum  to  the  line  of  action  of  the 
force.  This  does  not  always  correspond  with  the 
lengths  of  the  weight  and  power  arms,  as  will  be  seen 
by  referring  to  Fig.  36  (a),  (b),  (c)  and  (d). 

In  each  of  these  cases  the  weight  and  power  arms  must 
be  taken  as  represented  by  F  A  and  F  B  respectively. 


LEVERS 


41 


72.  A  little  consideration  will  show  that  the  most 
economic  way  to  utilize  a  power  is  by  placing  it  at 
right  angles  to  the  power  arm,  because  that  is  the  way 
by  which  the  greatest  "  effective  leverage "  can  be 
obtained. 

73.  If  either  the  power  or  the  weight  (or  both)  be  not 
perpendicular  to  their  respective  arms,  the  solutions 
can  be  worked  in  very  much  the  same  way  as  pre- 
viously shown.  For,  let  OPA  (Fig.  37)  represent 
a  lever  with  the  weight  acting  perpendicularly  at  A, 
and  the  power  in  the  direction  shown  at  0.     Then  F  A 

0, 


V 


Fig.  37. 

will  represent  the  leverage  of  the  weight,  and  F  B  the 
leverage  of  the  power. 

At  A  erect  the  perpendicular  A  C  equal  to  the  power, 
and  join  F  G.  Make  the  angle  B  F  D  equal  to  the 
angle  AFC.  Let  the  line  F D  intercept  the  direction 
of  the  power  at  D.     Then  B  D  will  represent  the  weight. 

To  find  the  power,  make  BD  equal  to  the  weight 
and  join  F  D.  Make  the  angle  AFC  equal  to  the 
angle  B  F  D,  and  let  the  line  F  C  meet  the  perpen- 
dicular from  A  at  C.  Then  A  G  will  represent  the 
power. 


42        ELEMENTARY   PKINCUPLES    OF    GRAPHIC    STATICS 

To  work  the  above  problem  mathematically,  B  F 
and  FA  will  still  represent  the  leverages,  therefore, 
taking  the  moments  about  F, 

P  X  FB=W  X  FA. 

The  forces  shown  in  Fig.  36  (c),  {d)  and  (e)  are  not 
parallel.  In  Chapter  IV  a  better  method  will  be  shown 
for  dealing  with  these  cases. 

Examples  to  Chapter  II. 

1.  If  the  force  scale  be  f'  =  100  lbs.,  what  does 
^4  B  represent  ? 

A— '^B 

Ex.  C'h.  II.— Quest.   1. 

2.  A  body  weighs  46  lbs.  To  a  scale  of  i/  =  10  lbs. 
draw  a  line  showing  the  force  exerted  by  it. 

3.  One  force  is  equal  to  12-5  lbs.,  and  another,  acting 
in  the  same  straight  line,  is  equal  to  23  lbs. 

Graphically  show  the  resultant — 
{a)  if  they  act  in  the  same  direction. 
(6)  if  they  act  in  opposite  directions. 

4.  A  beam,  12  ft.  long  and  weighing  1|-  cwts.,  sup- 
ports a  load  of  4  cwts.  at  its  centre,  and  another  of 
3*5  cwts.  4  ft.  from  one  end. 

(a)  Draw  a  line  showing  the  total  load. 

(6)  What  is  the  total  reactions  of  the  walls  ? 

(c)  What  is  the  direction  of  the  reactions  ? 

5.  A  ladder  leans  against  a  smooth  upright  wall. 
Wliat  is  the  direction  of  the  force  exerted  by  the  wall 
to  support  it  ? 

6.  What  is  meant  by  the  moment  of  a  force  ?  How 
is  it  found  ? 


EXAIVIPLES   TO  CHAPTER   II 


43 


7.  A  cantilever  5  ft.  long  supports  a  load  of  2 
cwts.  at  its  outer  end. 

What  is  the  moment  of  the  load — 
{a)  at  the  wall  end  ? 
(6)  at  the  centre  ? 
(c)  at  the  outer  end  ? 

8.  A  beam  over  a  15'. 0''  span  carries  a  certain  con- 
centrated load. 

If  the  reactions  of  the  supports  due  to  this  load  be 
4 J  tons  and  If  tons  respectively,  what  is  the  amount 
of  the  load,  and  where  is  it  placed  ? 

9.  A  bar  4'. 6''  long  works  on  a  pivot  which  is  V.(j'' 
from  one  end. 

If  a  weight  of  21  cwts.  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
shorter  section,  what  weight  must  be  placed  at  the 
end  of  the  longer  section  to  balance  it  ?  (Neglect  the 
weight  of  the  bar.) 

10.  Two  walls  6'  apart  support  a  beam  on  which  is 
placed  a  load  weighing  1200  lbs. 

(a)  If  the  load  is  placed  2*5  ft.  from  one  end,  what 
portion  of  the  load  does  each  wall  support  ? 

(6)  If  the  beam  weighs  150  lbs.,  what  is  the  total 
load  on  each  wall  ? 


Chapter  III 
CENTRE    OF    GRAVITY— BOW'S    NOTATION 

74.  Centre  of  Gravity. — We  speak  of  the  weight 
of  a  body.  The  weight  is  simply  a  downward  force 
exerted  by  gravity.  The  body  is  made  up  of  innumer- 
able particles,  on  each  of  which  gravity  exerts  a  down- 
ward force.  These  forces,  for  all  practical  purposes, 
may  be  considered  as  parallel,  and  the  weight  of  the 
body  is  the  resultant  of  all  these  smaller  forces. 

If  a  solid  body  be  freely  supported  in  any  position, 
the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant  force  will  pass  verti- 
cally through  the  body.  If  it  be  held  from  a  different 
point,  the  force  exerted  on  each  particle,  and  the  resul- 
tant of  these  forces,  will  again  be  vertical,  and  the 
second  resultant  will  intersect  the  first  at  a  certain 
point.  In  whatever  position  the  body  is  held  the 
resultant  forces  wdll  cross  each  other  at  the  same  point. 

This  point  is  called  the  Centre  of  Gravity  (e.g.)  of  the 
body,  and  w^e  may  assume  that  its  whole  weight  is 
concentrated  there. 

75.  The  e.g.  of  a  thin  sheet  can  easily  be  found  experi- 
mentally by  suspending  the  sheet  in  any  position  and 
marking  across  it  in  line  with  the  suspension  string,  as 
shown  in  Fig.  38  (a).  Suspend  it  in  another  position, 
and  mark  as  before  (Fig.  38  (b)). 

The  intersection  of  these  tw^o  lines  will  give  the  e.g. 
of  the  sheet. 


CENTRE    OF   GRAVITY 


45 


FiCx. 


76.  The  e.g.  of  a  thin  sheet  or  lamina  in  the  form  of  a 
parallelogram  is  given  by  the  intersection  of  the  dia- 
gonals (Fig.  39). 


Fig.  39 


77.  To  find  the  e.g.  of  the  triangular  lamina  ABC 
(Fig.  40),  bisect  the  side  B  C  in  D,  and  join  A  D.  Bisect 
another  side  as  A  B  in  E,  and  join  E  C. 

The  point  F,  where  E  C  cuts  A  D,  is  the  e.g.  of  the 
trianofle. 


h 


FD  is  I  of  A  D,  and  F  E  is  1  of  G  E,  therefore  we 


46 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


may  find  the  e.g.  of  a  triangle  by  joining  the  middle 
point  of  any  side  to  the  opposite  angle,  and  taking  a 
point  on  this  line  J  of  its  length  from  the  bisected  line. 
Tlie  student  may  adopt  either  method. 


B 


F 


'■•'." 

1 

_  .  .  . 

4 • 

•   . 

\ 

,    » 

■■■ 

'  *->•<■  ' 

Y  ■ 

■.,.ri 

.  •  •   eg.-  . 

"\- 

.iA           *    *    -  • 

H 

c 

Fig.  41. 

D 

Q 

78.  The  e.g.  of  a  trapezium  or  trapezoid.  Let  A  BC  D 
(Fig.  41)  be  the  trapezium.  On  each  side  oi  A  B  mark 
o^  A  E  and  B  F  equal  to  the  base  C  D,  and  on  each 
side  oi  C  D  mark  ofi  C  H  and  D  G  equal  to  the  top  A  B. 
Join  E  O  and  F  H.  The  intersection  of  these  lines  gives 
the  e.g.  oiABGD. 

79.  To  find  the  e.g.  of  irregular  rectilineal  figures  it  is 
generally  necessary  to  divide  the  figure  into  triangles 
or  parallelograms. 

As  an  example,  we 
will  proceed  to  find  the 
e.g.  of  the  quadrilateral 
ABC  D  (Fig.  42). 

Divide  the  figure  into 
two  triangles  by  joining 
AC. 

Find  the  e.g.  of  each 
as  shown  in  §  77,  and 
let  these  be  at  E  and  F. 

These    two     triangles 


CENTRE   OF   GRAVITY  47 

are  portions  of  a  figure  which  is  supposed  to  be  of 
uniform  density,  therefore  the  weight  of  each  is  in 
proportion  to  its  area.  But  the  weight  of  each  is  a 
do\\Tiward  force  acting  at  its  e.g.  (§  74),  hence  we  have 
two  like  parallel  forces,  and  it  is'necessary  to  find  the 
resultant  force.  ^ 

Through  E,  the  e.g.  of  the  larger  triangle,  draw  the 
perpendicular  H  I  equal  to  the  smaller  force,  and 
through  F,  the  e.g.  of  the  smaller  triangle,  draw  the 
perpendicular  M  N  equal  to  the  larger  force.  Join  H  N 
and  M  I.  Through  0,  where  they  intersect,  draw  the 
perpendicular  L  K. 

Then  L  K  is  the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant  of  the 
two  forces  at  E  and  F,  that  is,  of  the  two  triangles. 
But  the  two  triangles  make  up  the  figure  A  B  C  D, 
therefore  it  is  the  line  of  action  of  the  resultant  of 
the  whole  figure,  hence  the  e.g.  of  the  whole  figure  lies 
in  LK. 

But  it  is  clear  that  the  e.g.  of  the  whole  figure  must 
lie  in  a  line  joining  the  c.g.s  of  its  two  portions, 
therefore  the  e.g.  of  the  whole  figure  is  at  the  point  P, 
where  the  line  L  K  crosses  the  line  E  F. 

80.  To  find  the  e.g.  of  a  mass  whose  cross  section  is 
uniform  in  size  and  shape,  it  is  sufficient  to  find  the  e.g. 
of  a  lamina  of  the  same  size  and  shape  as  the  cross 
section. 

Fig.  43  represents  a  wall  of  regular  dimensions.  If 
this  wall  be  considered  divided  up  into  an  indefinite 
number  of  thin  vertical  sections  parallel  with  the  end 
of  the  wall,  then  A  (the  intersection  of  the  diagonals) 
gives  the  e.g.  of  the  first  lamina,  and  B  the  e.g.  of  the 
last. 

The  line  xi  B  passes  through  the  e.g.  of  each  lamina, 


48        ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

and  C,  the  iniddle  point  of  A  B,  in  the  e.g.  of  the  whole 
wall. 


6s,. 


-C. 


D    E 


> 

' 

•     • 

'VA 

\y 

F 

C 

Fig.  43. 


D  E  F  G  is  n  cross  section  of  the  same  wall,  so  it  can 
be  seen  that  the  e.g.  of  the  whole  wall  comes  directly 
behind  the  point  A,  the  e.g.  of  a  lamina  of  cross  section. 
The  student  will  now  understand  why  P  (Fig.  35)  is 
placed  at  half  the  thickness  of  the  wall,  this  being  the 
centre  of  the  pressure  exerted  by  the  wall. 

8i.  The    e.g.  of    a  door  may  be  found    by  drawing 
the  diagonals. 

Since  the  weight  of  a  door  acts  vertically  through  its 
e.g.,  the  leverage  with  which  the  door 
acts  on  its  hinges  is  half  the  width  of 
the  door.  Either 
hinge  may  be  con- 
sidered as  the  ful- 
crum, then  the  other 
becomes  the  power 
which  maintains 

equilibrium. 

Thus  a  door  is  an 
example  of  a  lever,  the  weight  being 


BOW  S    NOTATION 


49 


represented  by  the  weight  of  the  door,  the  weight  arm 
being  half  the  width  of  the  door,  the  power  being  the 
reaction  at  one  of  the  hinges,  the  power  arm  the  distance 
between  the  two  hinges,  and  the  fulcrum  the  other 
hinge. 

Reference  to  Figs.  44  and  45  will  make  this  clear. 

82.  Bow's  Notation. — Before  proceeding  any  fur- 
ther, it  may  be  advisable  to  explain  the  system  of 
lettering  diagrams  as  devised  by  R.  H.  Bow,  C.E., 
F.R.S.E.  This  system  has  innumerable  advantages, 
and  will  amply  repay  the  student  for  the  time  spent 
in  mastering  it. 

It  will  be  adopted  in  all  the  succeeding  exercises. 
It  consists  of  lettering  (or  numbering)  all  the  angles  or 
spaces  formed  by  the  external  forces,  and  when  nam- 
ing a  force  to  do  so  clockwise. 

Fig.  46  is  given  as  an  illustration. 
Here  there    are   three   forces   acting  upwards,  and 
two  acting  downwards,  and,  if  the  system  be  in  equi- 
librium, the  sum   of   the   three  forces   is  equal  to  the 
sum  of  the  two. 

There  are  five  forces,  consequently  five  spaces. 
Place  a  letter  in  each  space  as  A,  B,  C,  D,  and  E. 
Other  letters  or  numbers  would  do,  and  they  may  be 
placed  in  any  order,   but  it  is  well  to  be  systematic 


Ciirts. 
5 


B 


cwts. 
3 


cwts. 

b 


D 


cwts 


(a) 


cwts. 
t 


ib) 


■  b 

€ 


Fig.  46. 


50        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

and  adopt  a  uniform  practice.  There  is  a  force  divid- 
ing the  spaces  A  and  B,.  so  this  force  will  be  named 
by  those  two  letters,  but  as  in  clockwise  order  A 
would  come  before  B,  the  force  is  named  A  B^  not 
B  A .  Similarly  the  other  forces  are  B  C,  CD,  D  E, 
and  A   E. 

83.  It  will  be  necessary  to  draw  lines  representing 
the  magnitude  and  direction  of  those  forces,  which  lines 
will  have  the  same  names  as  the  above,  but  small  letters 
will  be  used  instead  of  capitals. 

84.  Now,  if  a  line  as      ^ Y  represents 

a  force,  the  force  must  be  considered  as  acting  from 
Z  to  7  or  from  Y  to  X,  that  is,  X  or  Y  must  be  first  in 
its  course  of  action. 

In  Bow's  notation  the  letter  which  is  placed  first  in 
the  course  of  action  of  a  force  is  the  one  which  comes 
first  in  the  clockwise  notation. 

Draw  a  line  representing  the  force  A  B  (Fig.  46). 

Since  A  is  the  first  letter  in  the  clockwise  order,  and 
the  force  acts  upwards,  a  must  be  placed  at  the  bottom. 
The  next  force  is  B  C,  and  this  acts  upwards,  so  the  h  of 
the  first  force  becomes  the  first  point  in  the  line  of  action 
of  the  second  force,  which  is  again  drawn  upwards. 
Similarly  the  c  of  the  second  force  becomes  the  first 
point  of  the  third  force  C  D,  but  this  force  acts  down- 
wards, so  cd  must  be  measured  off  downwards.  D  E 
acts  upwards,  hence  d  e  must  be  measured  upwards. 
E  A  acts  downwards,  and  e  a  is  measured  in  that 
direction. 

(It  should  be  noted  that  this  is  simply  an  application 
of  addition  and  subtraction  as  shown  in  §  9.) 

As  this  last  point  corresponds  with  the  first,  the  answer. 


bow's  notation  51 

or  resultant,  is  zero.  If  the  last  point  had  not  fallen  on 
the  first,  there  would  have  been  a  resultant  force  acting 
upwards  or  downwards  according  as  the  last  point 
would  have  been  above  or  below  a. 

85.  The  diagram  showing  the  beam  (or  any  other 
structure)  and  the  position  of  its  loads  is  called  the 
"  frame  diagram,"  and  the  diagram  representing  the 
forces  drawn  to  scale  is  called  the  "  force  diagram." 

Fig.  46  (a)  is  the  frame  diagram,  and  Fig.  46  (6)  is  the 
force  diagram. 

86.  This  method  is  extremely  useful  in  finding  the 
resultant  of  any  number  of  forces.  The  forces,  as 
shown  on  the  frame  diagram,  should  be  named  in  clock- 
wise order,  then  the  first  and  last  letters  will  name  the 
resultant  and  give  its  direction  as  shown  on  the  force 
diagram. 

Referring  to  Fig.  46,  let  it  be  required  to  find  the 
resultant  of  the  three  forces  shown  on  the  top  of  the 
beam.  These  forces  are  A  B,  B  C,  and  CD.  A  is  the 
first  letter,  and  D  the  last  of  this  series,  so  a  c?  on  the 
force  diagram  represents  the  magnitude  and  direction 
of  the  resultant  force.  By  measuring  ad  it  is  found 
equal  to  2  cwts.,  and  as  a  cZ  also  gives  the  direction,  the 
force  acts  from  a  to  d,  that  is,  in  an  upward  direction. 

Again,  suppose  the  resultant  of  the  two  forces  on  the 
right  is  required.  These  are  C  D  and  D  E.  The  first 
and  last  letter  are  C  and  E,  so  c  e  on  the  force  diagram 
fully  represents  the  resultant  of  these  forces,  and  is 
equal  to  4  cwts.,  acting  in  a  downward  direction. 

87.  As  in  the  case  of  the  known  forces,  the  letters 
have  to  be  placed  with  due  regard  to  the  direction  in 
which  the  force  is  acting,  so  will  the  letters  indicate  the 
direction  of  the  unknown  ones. 


52 


ELEMENTARY   PKINCIPI-ES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


Suppose  it  had  been  required  to  find  the  direction  of 
the  force  on  the  left  of  Fig.  46  (a).  This  force  is  known 
a>»E  A,  and  on  referring  to  the  force  diagram  we  find  that 
to  proceed  from  e  to  a  we  go  downwards,  hence  the 
force  E  A  acts  in  that  direction. 

88.  If  the  structure  on  which  the  forces  act  be  an 
open  framed  one,  in  addition  to  the  spaces  between  the 
external  forces  being  lettered,  a  letter  is  placed  in  every 
space  of  the  frame. 

As  an  example  see  Fig.  47. 

The  external  forces  are  the  load  of  3  tons  and  the 
two  reactions  of  the  supports.     The  force  exerted  by 


A 

tons. 

J 

B 

\   E       ^ 

A 

G 

/ 

/\ 

/ 

/ 

o\f 

\ 

/ 

H 

V 

'  J' 

I 

•^ 

"  ci>     re 

m. 

Cf 

c 

^c 

f 

n 

m 

Fig.  47. 


the  left  hand  support  would  be  known  SbsC  A,  the  3  tons 
load  as  A  B,  and  the  force  exerted  by  the  right  hand 
support  as  B  C. 

The  spaces  in  the  frame  are  now  lettered  as  D,  E,  F, 
G,  H,  I  and  J. 

89.  An  examination  of  the  figure  will  show  that 
there  is  a  letter  on  each  side  of  every  bar,  and  these 
letters  will  name  the  bar,  but  which  letter  comes  first 
in  considering  the  forces  will  depend  on  which  end  of 
the  bar  is  under  consideration.     Thus,   take  the  bar 


LOAD — STEESS  53 

dividing  the  spaces  F  and  C.  The  bars  meeting  at  the 
left  of  this  are  named,  according  to  the  clockwise  order, 
G  D,  D  E,  E  F  and  F  G,  and  at  the  other  end  they  are 
F  G,GH,  H  G,  and  G F.  Hence,  when  dealing  with 
the  one  end  the  bar  is  named  F  G,  and  when  dealing 
with  the  other  it  becomes  G  F. 

90.  As  this  part  of  the  work  is  devoted  to  Bow's 
notation,  there  are  two  other  things  which  it  may  be 
advantageous  to  point  out,  but  which  will  not  be 
thoroughly  understood  until  the  student  is  dealing  with 
the  effects  of  loads  upon  framed  structures  (Chap.  VII.). 

The  first  of  these  is Every  bar  surrounding 

a  space  in  the  frame  diagram  meets  at  the  same  point 
in  the  stress  diagram,  and  this  point  is  named  by  the 
letter  in  the  space  of  the  frame  diagram. 

The  second  is The  external  forces  and  bars 

meeting  at  a  point  in  the  frame  diagram  will  form  the 
sides  of  a  polygon  in  the  stress  diagram. 

91.  Load. — By  a  load  on  a  structure  is  meant  the 
sum  of  all  the  forces  acting  upon  it,  together  with  the 
weight  of  the  structure  itself. 

92.  Stress — tension  and  compression. — If  a  force 
acts  on  a  body,  it  produces  from  that  body  an  equal  and 
opposite  resisting  force. 

This  resistance  is  known  as  stress. 

If  a  weight  be  suspended  by  a  string,  the  string  exerts 
an  upward  force  equal  to  the  downward  pull  of  the 
weight ;  and,  if  a  prop  or  strut  supports  a  load,  it 
pushes  against  it  with  a  force  equal  to  that  of  the  load. 

The  force  exerted  by  the  string  in  resisting  elongation 
is  called  its  tensile  stress  or  tension,  and  the  resistance 
to  crushing  set  up  in  the  strut  is  known  as  compressive 
stress  or  compression. 


54        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

But  we  know  that  the  string  in  itself  could  not  support 
a  weight  without  being  attached  to  some  support  to 
which  the  string  transmits  the  force.  The  string  exerts 
a  downward  pull  at  the  support,  as  well  as  an  upward 
pull  at  the  weight.  Since  each  end  of  the  string  exerts 
a  force  equal  to  the  weight,  it  might  be  supposed  that 
the  tension  in  the  string  is  twice  the  force  exerted  by 
the  weight,  but  it  is  not  so. 

93.  The  student  can  easily  satisfy  himself  that  the 
tension  in  the  string  is  only  equal  to  the  force  at  one 
end  if  he  will  fit  up  an  apparatus  as  shown  in  Fig.  48. 


^ <X^E}^^ 


Fig.  48. 

This  consists  of  two  equal  weights,  two  pulleys,  and 
a  spring-balance  attached  to  the  two  weights. 

Although  there  is  a  force  acting  at  each  end,  the 
balance  will  show  that  the  tension  is  only  equal  to  one 
of  them. 

Similarly  with  the  strut,  the  load  and  the  support 
each  exert  a  force  against  it  at  opposite  ends,  but  the 
stress  set  up  is  only  equal  to  one  of  them. 

When  a  bar  is  in  tension  each  end  exerts  a  force 
inwards,  and  these  two  forces  are  equal ;  and  when  a 
bar  is  in  compression  the  two  ends  exert  outward 
forces  which  are  equal  to  one  another. 

By  marking  the  senses  at  each  end  of  a  bar,  a  glance 
will  show  the  kind  of  stress  in  that  bar. 

94.  Since  a  compression  bar  exerts  an  outward  force 


EXAMPLES   TO    CHAPTER    III. 


55 


at  each  end,  the  arrows  will  point  outwards,  thus  : — 
< > ;     and  since  a  tension  bar  exerts  an  inward 

pull  at  each  end  it  is  marked  thus  : >    < • 

95.  Strain. — The  forces  which  produce  tension  or 
compression  in  a  bar  also  cause  an  alteration  in  its  form. 
This  change  of  form  may  be  so  slight  that,  upon  the 
removal  of  the  forces,  the  bar  will  regain  its  original 
shape,  or  it  may  be  such  that  the  bar  is  permanently 
inj  ured. 

In  either  case  this  change  of  form  is  known  as  strain. 

96.  When  expressing  the  amount  of  stress  in  a  bar, 
the  sign  -t-  (plus)  is  often  prefixed  for  compression  bars, 
and  the  sign  —  (minus)  for  tension  bars,  instead  of 
indicating  it  by  means  of  arrows. 

Another  method  of  indicating  the  kind  of  stress  is  to 
draw  thick  or  double  lines  for  compression  bars  and  thin 
ones  for  tension  bars. 

Examples  to  Chapter  III. 

1.  Find  the  e.g.  of  a  wall  6  ft.  high,  3'  6''  broad  at  the 
base,  and  2'  at  the  top,  one  face  being  vertical. 

2.  Fig.  1  shows  a  beam  supporting  a  body  which 
weighs  225  lbs. 


Ex.  Ch.  III.— Fig.   1. 

Draw  a  Hne  indicating  the  position  and  direction  of 
the  force  exerted  by  the  body.     Scale  l''=:100  lbs. 

3.  Two  loads,  3  tons  and  4  tons,  are  placed  5  ft.  apart 
on  a  beam.     Where  is  the  centre  of  pressure  ? 


56         ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


4.  Draw  a  vertical  line  which  will  pass  through  the 
e.g.  of  the  wall  shown  in  Fig.  2. 


.W 


t 

r7 
'/ 

% 

/ 

.  Ch.  III.— Fig.  2. 

Ex. 

//////////////////// 
Ch.  III.— Fig.  3 

If  the  wall  shown  weighs  135  lbs.  per  c.  ft.,  what   is 
its  weight  per  foot  run  ? 

5.  Find  the  e.g.  of  the  triangle  Fig.  3. 

6.  Fig.  4  shows  a  triangular  prism  lying  on  a  beam. 
If  the  prism  weighs  1,000  lbs.,  what  are  the  reactions 

of  each  support  due  to  it  ? 


^ 


i.L 


^. 


■^  2.0   ^ 


L'.i'- 


Ex.  Ch.  III.— Fig.  4. 

7.  In  Fig.  5  the  directions  of  a  number  of  forces  acting 
at  a  point  are  given. 

Name  them  according  to  Bow's  Notation. 

8.  Fig.  6  represents  five  parallel  forces  in  equilibrium. 


.  Ch.  III.— Fig. 

t3 

5. 

2        6 
cults,    cures. 

/ 
cwt 

cu/ts 

Ex.  Ch.  III.- 

-Fig. 

cults. 


EXAMPLES    TO    CHAPTER   HI 


57 


Draw  the  force  diagram.     Scale  1"=4  cwts. 

9.  Five  parallel  forces  in  equilibrium  are  shown  in 

Ficr.  7. 


Give  the  magnitude 
and  direction  of  the 
force  A  B. 

10.  A  bar  5  ft.  long 
is  secured  by  a  pivot 
at   one   end,    while    a 


mt$  curt, 


(0 

eufts 

B      I  C  tOi  £ 

/\  2  ]cwts. 

Ex.  Ch.  III.— Fig.  7. 

14  lb.  weight  is  suspended  at  the  other. 

(a)  Neglecting  the  weight  of  the  lever,  what  power  is 
required  2  ft.  from  the  pivot  to  support  it  ? 

(b)  What  are  the  magnitude  and  direction  of  the  force 
exerted  by  the  pivot  ? 


Chapter  IV 


PARALLELOGRAM,  TRIANGLE,   AND  POLYGON 
OF  FORCES,   AND  RETAINING  WALLS 

97.  Up  to  the  present  only  forces  whose  Hnes  of 
action  are  parallel  have  been  dealt  with.  It  now 
becomes  necessary  to  examine  other  forces. 

The  student  should  again  take  up  his  spring  balances 
and  arrange  them  as  in  Fig.  18.  He  may  dispense 
with  the  pulley,  and  must  remember  that  the  balances 
are  only  used  to  register  the  force  exerted  by  the  string 
attached  to  each. 

Now  that  the  two  strings  are  exerting  a  force  parallel 
and  opposite  to  that  exerted  by  the  weight,  their  sum 

is  equal  to  the  down- 
ward force.  With  the 
same  weight  attached,  he 
should  increase  the  dis- 
tance between  the  points 
of  suspension  (Fig.  49).  A 
glance  at  the  balances 
may  now  cause  him  no 
little  surprise.  He  should 
try  them  in  three  or  four 
positions,  each  time  in- 
creasing the  distance  between  the  points  of  support, 
and  noting  the  results. 

His  observations  may  be  summarized  as  follows  : — 


Fig.  49. 


PARALLELOGRAM   OF  FORCES 


69 


{a)  When  the  supporting  strings  are  no  longer  parallel 
to  the  line  of  action  of  the  force  exerted  by  the  weight, 
the  sum  of  the  forces  exerted  by  them  exceeds  that 
exerted  by  the  weight,  (b)  The  further  they  are  from 
being  parallel  (that  is,  the  greater  the  angle  between 
them)  the  greater  is  the  force  they  have  to  exert  to 
support  the  weight. 

98.  Parallelogram  of  Forces. — Selecting  one  of 
these  positions,  and  adopt- 
ing a  convenient  scale,  as 
4''  =  1  lb.,  a  line  should  be 
marked  behind,  and  parallel 
to,  each  supporting  string, 
and  the  tension  measured 
on  each  as  indicated  by  the 
balance. 

Complete  the  parallelo- 
gram, and  draw  the  diagonal 
as  shown  in  Fig.  50. 

Measure  the  diagonal  to 
the  same  scale.  ^^^-  ^^• 

Two  things  will  now  be  noticed  : — First,  the 
diagonal  measured  to  scale  will  give  the  same  force  as 
that  exerted  by  the  weight.  Second,  the  diagonal 
will  be  in  line  with  the  string  supporting  the  weight. 

This  should  be  verified  by  trying  it  in  each  of  the 
former  positions. 

To  change  the  direction  of  the  pull  of  the  weights, 
three  pulleys  and  three  weights  should  be  fitted  up  as 
shown  in  Fig.  51. 

It  will  be  seen  that  similar  results  are  obtained. 

Further,  any  two  of  the  forces  can  be  utilized  to  find 
the  third,  as  indicated  by  the  dotted  lines. 


60        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

Let  US  examine  these  results  further. 

The  force  exerted  by  the  weight  keeps  the  other  two 
forces  in  position,  so  it  is  the  equilibrant  of  them  (§  33). 
The  two  strings  da  and  dc  support  the  7  lb.  weight, 
and  keep  it  in  equilibrium,  but  a  force  which  could 
be  substituted  for  these  two  forces  is  their  resultant, 
and  to  support  the  weight  in  that  position  it  is  evident 
that  a  force  is  required  which  is  equal  to  that  exerted 


Fig.  51. 


by  the  weight  (or  equilibrant),  and  which  acts  in  the 
opposite  direction  and  in  the  same  straight  line.  But 
the  diagonal  of  the  above  parallelogram  measured  to 
scale,  gives  a  force  equal  to  the  equilibrant,  and  is  in 
the  same  straight  line,  so  if  an  arrow  be  placed  on  it 
indicating  that  it  acts  in  the  opposite  direction  to  the 
equilibrant,  it  will  represent  the  resultant  of  the  other 
two  forces. 

99.  Hence,  if  the  magnitude   and  direction  of  two 


TRIANGLE   OF   FORCES  61 

forces  be  known,  by  completing  the  parallelogram  and 
drawing  the  diagonal  the  magnitude  and  direction  of 
the  resultant  force  is  obtained. 

100.  It  is  evident  that  the  resultant  of  any  two 
forces  (not  parallel)  must  pass  through  the  point  of 
intersection  of  the  lines  of  action  of  the  two  forces. 

10 1.  If  three  non-parallel  forces  maintain  equili- 
brium, the  lines  of  direction  of  these  forces,  if  pro- 
duced, will  meet  at  the  same  point.  Any  two  of  the 
forces  can  be  replaced  by  a  resultant,  and,  since  the 
third  force  balanced  these  two,  it  will  balance  their 
resultant,  and  this  it  can  only  do  by  acting  at  the 
same  point. 

102. — Triangle  of  Forces. — On  further  examining 
the  parallelogram  ah  c  d  (Fig.  51),  it  is  seen  to  be  made 
up  of  two  equal  triangles. 

The  triangle  ah  d  has  the  side  d  a  parallel  and  equal 
to  the  3  lb.  force,  the  side  a  h  parallel  and  equal  to  the 
5  lb.  force,  and  the  side  h  d  parallel  and  equal  to  the 
7  lb.  force. 

li  h  d  he  considered  as  representing  the  equilibrant, 
then  it  will  represent  a  force  acting  from  h  to  d,  and  the 
three  sides  proceeding  from  d  to  a,  a  to  h,  and  h  to  d, 
will  give  the  sense  of  the  three  forces. 

103.  Hence,  if  three  forces  be  in  equilibrium,  it  is 
possible  to  draw  a  triangle  with  sides  parallel  to  the 
line  of  action  of  each  force,  and  representing  them  in 
magnitude  each  to  each,  and  whose  sides,  taken  in  order 
round  the  triangle,  will  give  the  sense  of  each  force. 

If,  therefore,  the  sense  of  one  of  the  forces  be  known, 
the  sense  of  the  others  is  known. 

104.  The  converse  is  equally  true  : — 

If  it  be  possible  to  form  a  triangle  with  sides  parallel 


62        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

to  the  lines  of  action  of  the  forces  and  equal  to  them  in 
magnitude,  and  whose  sides  represent  the  sense  of  each 
taken  in  order  round  the  triangle,  then  the  three  forces 
are  in  equilibrium. 

105.  Each  of  these  three  forces  must  be  the  equili- 
brant  of  the  other  two,  hence  if  the  sense  of  one  be 
reversed,  then  that  force  becomes  the  resultant  of  the 
others. 

106.  If,  on  examining  a  triangle  of  forces,  it  is  found 
that  the  sense  of  one  force  is  opposite  to  the  others, 
then  the  force  represented  by  that  line  is  the  resultant 
of  the  others. 

107.  If  three  forces  (not  parallel)  maintain  equili- 
brium, the  sum  of  any  two  must  be  greater  than  the 
third. 

Since  the  three  are  in  equilibrium,  it  must  be  possible 
to  form  a  triangle  with  sides  parallel  to  and  proportional 
to  the  forces,  but  unless  any  two  are  greater  than  the 
third  this  is  impossible. 

108.  If  three  forces,  of  which  the  two  smaller  are 
equal  to  the  greater,  maintain  equilibrium,  then  they 
are  all  parallel,  and  the  two  smaller  act  in  the  opposite 
direction  to  the  greater. 

109.  Since,  when  three  non-parallel  forces  are  in 
equilibrium,  it  is  possible  to  form  a  triangle  with  sides 
equal  and  parallel  to  the  forces  represented  by  them, 
and  it  is  impossible  to  make  any  triangle  with  two 
parallel  sides,  there  cannot  be  three  such  forces,  two 
of  which  are  parallel,  in  equilibrium. 

no.  If,  then,  in  any  structure  there  be  three  bars 
(or  two  bars  and  an  external  force)  meeting  at  a  point, 
and  any  two  of  thembe  parallel,  the  forces  exerted  by 
the  two  parallel  ones  are  equal  and  opposite,  and  the 


NON-PARALLEL   FORCES 


63 


third  bar  exerts  no  force.  (N.B. — This  is  not  true  if 
there  be  more  than  three  bars  or  more  than  three  bars 
and  forces  together.) 

To  illustrate  this,  three  portions  of  different  girders 
are  shown  (Fig.  52). 


c 


Fig.  52. 

In  each  of  the  above  cases  the  force  exerted  hy  A  B 
acts  directly  on  the  end  of  the  bar  C  A,  and  produces 
from  it  an  equal  and  opposite  force.  If  there  were 
either  a  pull  or  a  thrust  in  5  C,  it  is  evident  that  equili- 
brium would  not  be  maintained.  But  we  know  the 
joint  is  in  equilibrium,  hence  there  is  neither  tension 
nor  compression  in  the  bar  B  G,  i.e.  the  force  exerted 
hy  BG  =  0. 

III.  If  the  magnitude  of  two  forces  maintaining 
equilibrium  with  a  third  force  whose  magnitude  and 
direction  is  known,  be  given,  then  their  directions  can 
be  ascertained. 


< 


Fig.  53. 


64        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF    GRAPHIC   STATICS 

Let  A  B  (Fig.  53)  be  the  known  force.  Draw  a  h 
parallel  and  equal  to  this  force.  With  a  as  centre, 
describe  an  arc  with  a  radius  equal  to  the  line  repre- 
senting one  of  the  other  forces,  and  with  h  as  centre 
and  a  radius  equal  to  the  line  representing  the  re- 
maining force  describe  an  arc  cutting  the  first  at  c. 
Join  c  h  and  c  a. 

Their  directions  are  given  by  6  c  and  c  a,  and  a  refer- 
ence to  Fig.  53  will  show  they  can  be  transferred  to 
either  end  of  A  B. 

1X2.  If  three  forces  whose  directions  are  given,  act 
at  a  point  in  equilibrium,  and  the  magnitude  of  one  be 
known,  then  the  magnitude  of  the  others  can  be  found. 

Fig.  54  shows  a  wall  and  the  foot  of  a  roof  truss. 
Suppose  the  reaction  of  the  wall  to  be  30  cwts.,  then 
this  is  an  upward  force  resisting  the  action  of  the  rafter 
and  the  tiebeam. 

Letter  the  spaces  as  shown,  and  draw  a  h  parallel  to 
A  B  and  equal  to  30  cwts.  From  h  draw  h  c  parallel 
to  B  C,  and  from  a  draw  a  line  parallel  to  C  A.    Then 


c 


Fig.  54. 


b  c  and  c  a  give  the  magnitude  and  directions  of  the 
forces  exerted  hy  B  C  and  C  A.  B  C  acts  towards  the 
joint,  and  C  A  from  it. 

113.  Two   or   more   forces   which   have   a   resultant 


RESOLUTION    OF   FORCES 


65 


Fig. 


force  are  called  the  com- 
ponents of  that  force. 

The  two  forces  A  and 
B  (Fig.  55)  have  a  re- 
sultant force  R.  R  is 
then  the  force  which 
could  be  substituted  for 
them  (§31).  It  is  equally 
correct  to  say  that  the  forces  A  and  B  could  be  sub- 
stituted for  the  force  R. 

A  and  B  are  the  components  of  R. 

If  the  direction  of  the  force  R  were  reversed  it  would 
become  the  equilibrant  of  the  forces  A  and  B  (§  33), 
then  the  three  forces  would  be  in  equilibrium.  But 
in  §  112  it  was  shown  that  if  a  force  be  known,  the 
magnitude  of  two  others  producing  equilibrium  and 
acting  along  given  directions  could  be  found.  Hence, 
if  R  were  considered  as  acting  in  the  opposite  direction, 
the  magnitude  of  the  forces  A  and  B  could  be  deter- 
mined. 

Fig.  56  shows  the  foot  of  the  rafter  of  a  couple  roof 
along  which  a  force  equal  to  2J  cwts.  is  acting.  It  is 
necessary  to  find  the  vertical  and  horizontal  components 

If  we  consider  the 
action  of  this  force  re- 
versed, then  it  will  act 
away  from  the  joint. 
Draw  ah  to  represent 
the  2J  cwts.  acting  in 
that  direction.  From 
h  draw  a  vertical  line, 
and  from  a  a  horizontal 
one  intersecting  it  at  c. 


66        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC   STATICS 


Fig. 


Then  h  c  and  c  a  will  represent  the  two  components 
in  direction  and  magnitude. 

(It  should  be  noticed  that  the  rafter  A  B  causes  a 
horizontal  thrust  equal  to  c  a,  which  tends  to  overturn 
the  wall,  and  a  vertical  thrust  equal  to  h  c.  These  have 
to  be  resisted  by  the  wall.) 

114.  If  a  body  A  (Fig.  57)  be  placed  on  a  smooth 

inclined  plane,  it  slides  in 
the  direction  shown  by  the 
arrow.  This  sliding  must 
be  caused  by  some  force 
acting  in  that  direction. 
One  of  the  forces  acting  on 
it  must  be  its  own  weight, 
but  this  acts  vertically,  and 

could  not  of  itself  produce  motion  down  the  plane,  so 
there  must  be  another  force  acting  on  it.  The  other 
force  is  "  the  reaction  of  the  plane,"  which  always  acts 
at  right  angles  to  the  plane.  The  force  which  causes 
the  body  to  move  along  the  plane  is  the  resultant  of 
the  force  caused  by  the  weight  of  the  body  and  the 
reaction  of  the  plane. 

But  the  force  acting  along  the  plane,  and  the  reaction 
of  the  plane,  are  two  forces  produced  by  the  vertical 
force  exerted  by  the  weight  of  the  body,  hence  they  are 
components  of  that  force. 

The  magnitude  of  this  vertical  force  is  known  and  the 
direction  of  the  two  component  forces,  so  it  is  possible 
to  find  their  magnitude  (§  113). 

If  it  were  necessary  to  keep  the  body  from  sliding, 
a  force  equal  and  opposite  to  the  one  acting  along  the 
plane  would  do  it. 

115.  It  is  clear  that  a  force  applied  horizontally,  as 


RESOLUTION  OF    FORCES 


67 


Fig.  58. 


shown  in  Fig.  58,  would  also  keep  the  body  in  equili- 
brium, hence  the  body  must  have  a  horizontal  thrust 
equal  to  that  necessary  to 
keep  it  in  position  when 
applied  in  that  direction. 
By  resolving  the  vertical 
force  exerted  by  the  body 
into  a  force  at  right  angles 
to  the  plane,  and  a  hori- 
zontal one,  the  horizontal 
thrust  of  the  body  is  obtained. 

1 1 6.  Since  we  know  the  weight  of  the  body  acts 
vertically,  and  the  plane  exerts  a  force  at  right  angles 
to  its  surface,  being  given  the  weight  of  the  body,  and 
the  inclination  of  the  plane,  we  can  find  either  the 
force  the  body  exerts  parallel  to  the  plane,  or  the  force 
it  exerts  horizontally. 

117.  Fig.  59  shows  a  cantilever  supported  by  a  strut 
and  loaded  with  2  cwts. 
Find    the      kind     and 
amount    of    stress    set 
up  in  each  member. 

Letter  the  spaces  on 
the  frame  diagram,  and 
draw  h  c  equal  to  2 
cwts.  From  c  draw  a 
line  parallel  to  C^,  and  from  h  draw  one  parallel  to 
A  B.     Let  them  meet  at  a. 

Then  c  a  and  a  h  will  represent  the  stresses. 

Since  the  force  represented  by  6  c  acts  downwards 
and  the  sense  must  be  in  the  same  direction  taken 
round  the  triangle,  therefore  c  to  a  gives  the  direction 
of  the  force  exerted  hy  C  A,  and  a  to  6  gives  the  direc- 


68 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


tion  of  the  force  exerted  hy  A  B.  ca  and  a  b  measured 
to  the  same  scale  as  that  by  which  b  c  was  drawn  will 
give  the  magnitude  of  the  forces  exerted  hy  C  A  and 
A  B  respectively. 

Since  C  A  acts  outwards  towards  the  joint,  and  A  B 
inwards  from  it,  the  former  is  in  compression  and  the 
latter  in  tension  (§  92). 

1 1 8.  Fig.  60  shows  a  loaded  cantilever  supported 
by  a  wrought  iron  rod. 


<N 


m 


B 


Fig.  60. 


The  construction  of  the  force  diagram  needs  no 
further  explanation. 

An  examination  of  the  force  diagram  will  show  that 
in  this  case  the  beam  is  in  compression  and  the  rod  in 
tension. 

119.  The  "  triangle  of  forces  "  is  most  useful  in  the 
solution  of  levers  when  the  forces  acting  on  them  are 
not  parallel. 

Let  AFB  (Fig.  61)  be  a  lever  with  the  "power" 
and  "  weight  "  acting  as  shown. 

In  order  to  maintain  equilibrium  there  must  be 
another  force  acting,  and  this  is  the  "  reaction  of  the 
fulcrum."  There  are  then  three  "  non-parallel  "  forces 
maintaining  equilibrium,  therefore  the  lines  of  direction 


NON-PARALLEL   FORCES 


of  these  three  forces   must  meet  at  the   same  point 

(§  101). 
Let  the  Unes  of  direction  of  P  and  W  meet  at  0,  then 


Fig.  61. 


the  hne  indicating  the  direction  of  the  reaction  of  the 
fulcrum  must  pass  through  0.  Since  the  reaction 
acts  at  the  fulcrum,  it  must  also  pass  through  F,  there- 
fore the  line  F  0  gives  the  direction  of  the  reaction  of 
the  fulcrum. 

At  0  there  are  now  shown  the  directions  of  three 
forces  in  equilibrium,  and,  if  one  be  known,  the  others 
can  be  determined  (§  112). 

Suppose  the  weight  (T^)  to  be  known. 

Letter  the  spaces,  and  draw  o  t  parallel,  and  equal  to, 
the  weight.  Complete  the  triangle  of  forces  by  drawing 
o  s  parallel  to  0  S,  and  i  s  parallel  to  T  S. 

t  s  completely  represents  the  reaction  of  the  fulcrum, 
and  s  o  completely  represents  the  power. 

120.  Again,  let  Fig.  62  represent  a  door  whose  hinges 
are  at  A  and  B,  and  let  it  be  required  to  find  the  hori- 
zontal reaction  of  the  hinge  A,  and  the  total  reaction 
of  the  hinge  B. 

Since  it  is  tlic  horizontal  reaction  of  A  that  is  re- 


70        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


w 


quired,  its  direction  must 
Q  intercept     that    of     the 
force  exerted  by  the  door 
at  0.     Join  B  0. 

Then  B  0  gives  the 
direction  of  the  total 
reaction  of  the  hinge  at 
B. 

At  0  the  direction  of 
three  forces  in  equiHbrium 
is  given,  and,  since  one 
of  them,  the  weight  of 
the  door,  is  known,  by  applying  the  triangle  of  forces 
the  others  can  be  found. 

121.  The  rafters  of  lean-to  or  pent  roofs  are  often 
found  fixed  as  shown  in  Fig.  63. 


Fig.   62. 


Fig.  63. 


RETAINING    WALLS 


71 


On  examining  the  forces  acting  on  this,  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  reaction  of  the  one  wall  is  in  a  horizontal 
direction,  and  this  intercepts  the  line  of  action  of  the 
load  on  the  roof  at  A.  The  third  force  is  the  reaction 
of  the  lower  wall,  and  its  direction  must  pass  through 
the   point   of    intersection    of    the    other    tvv^o    forces 

(§  101). 

Its  direction  is  therefore  given  by  the  line  A  G. 
Resolving  G  B  parallel  to  B  A  and  A  G  the  triangle 
c  &  a  is  formed,  c  a  now  gives  the  magnitude  and 
direction  of  the  thrust  of  the  rafter,  and,  by  finding 
the  horizontal  and  vertical  components  of  this  thrust, 
it  will  be  seen  that  the  lower  wall  has  to  support  the 
whole  weight  of  the  roof  as  well  as  resist  a  horizontal 
thrust,  whose  magnitude  is  given  by  c  d. 

By  forming  the  rafter  as  shown  in  Fig.  64,  the  roof 
is  supported  by  two 
parallel  forces.  Each 
wall  then  gets  one-half 
the  weight  of  the  roof, 
and  there  is  no  horizontal 
thrust. 

122.  Retaining 
Walls. — Walls  built  to 
sustain  water  or  earth 
are  called  retaining  walls, 
and   it  is  now  intended 

to  apply  the  knowledge  gained  in  the  preceding  pages 
to  ascertain  whether  any  proposed  retaining  wall 
is  sufficiently  strong  for  its  purpose. 

Before  this  can  be  done,  we  must  ascertain  the 
forces  at  work. 

It  is  clear  that  the  wall  is  put  to  resist  the  thrust  of 


72         ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

the  water  or  earth  behind  it.  We  will  first  examine 
this  resistance. 

It  was  shown  in  Chapter  III  that  the  weight  of  a 
body  can  be  considered  as  concentrated  at  its  centre 
of  gravity,  so  the  force  (or  resistance)  exerted  by  the 
retaining  wall  is  its  weight  acting  vertically  through  its 
e.g. 

By  taking  a  part  of  the  wall  1  ft.  in  length,  and  the 
area  of  the  cross  section,  we  have  the  number  of  cubic 
feet  in  the  part  of  the  wall  under  consideration.  Know- 
ing the  weight  of  1  cub.  ft.  of  the  particular  walling  (say 
1  cwt.  for  brickwork,  and  140  lbs.  for  masonry),  we  can 
now  ascertain  the  weight  or  vertical  force  exerted  by 
the  wall,  and,  since  it  acts  through  its  e.g.,  we  know  its 
line  of  action. 

123.  Next,  we  will  inquire  into  the  force  exerted  by 
water  on  a  retaining  wall  or  dam. 

Hydrostatics  teaches  us  that  water  always  exerts  a 
pressure  at  right  angles  to  the  sides  of  the  vessel  con- 
taining it  or  the  containing  surfaces,  and  that  the 
pressure  at  any  point  is  in  proportion  to  the  vertical 
distance  of  this  point  below  the  surface  of  the  water. 

124.  Since  the  pressure  at  the  bottom  of  a  retaining 
wall  depends  on  the  vertical  height  of  the  surface  of 
the  water  above  this  point,  a  line  equal  to  the  depth 
of  the  water  will  represent  the  magnitude  of  the  pressure 
at  this  point.  But  the  pressure  is  at  right  angles  to 
the  surface  of  the  wall,  so  the  line  representing  the 
magnitude  of  the  pressure  must  be  drawn  in  that 
direction. 

In  Figs.  65  and  66,  from  h,  the  bottom  of  the  wall, 
draw  b  c  perpendicular  to  ab  and  equal  to  the  vertical 
depth  of  the  water  ;  b  c  now  represents  the  magnitude 


RETAINING    WALLS 


73 


and  direction  of  the  pressure  of  the  water  at  this  point, 
where  of  course  the  pressure  is  greatest.  If  other 
points  be  taken  on  the  wall,  the  pressure  at  these  will 
be  less  as  the  vertical  height  to  the  surface  decreases, 
until  the  top  of  the  water  is  reached,  where  the  pressure 
is  nil. 

Hence,  if  a  c  be  joined,  the  triangle  ah  c  will  graphi- 
cally represent  the  total  pressure  on  a  section  of  the 
wall.  The  ordinates  are  drawn  showing  the  relative 
amount  of  pressure  at  different  points. 

125.  The  magnitude  of  this  pressure  must  now  be 
obtained. 


c^'^rg^:<^?^c.^r^>1    ^^  3^^^ifo2^^^^<-^^'>  g  °^  "^i 


Fig.  65. 


Fig.  66. 


The  triangle  ah  c  represents  the  section  of  a  volume 
of  water  whose  height  is  6  c  and  whose  base  is  a  h,  and, 
if  the  volume  pressing  on  1  ft.  of  the  length  of  the  wall 

be  taken,  its  cubical  contents  is  cubic  feet. 


But  1  cub.  ft.  of  water  weighs  62-5  lbs.,  therefore  the 
total  pressure  exerted  on  1  ft.  of  the  length  of  the  wall 


IS 


ah  X  he 


X  62-5  lbs. 


126.  Having  found  the  magnitude  of  the  pressure, 
its  direction  and  point  of  application  must  now  be 
considered.  The  weight  of  the  triangular  volume  of 
water  represented  hy  ah  c  must  be  treated  as  if  con- 
centrated at  its  e.g.,  and  it  presses  at  right  angles  to 


74 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF    GRAPHIC   STATICS 


the  inner  surface  of  the  wall,  therefore  a  line  through 
its  e.g.  perpendicular  to  this  surface  will  give  the  direc- 
tion of  this  pressure,  and  its  point  of  application  is 
where  this  line  meets  the  wall. 

The  point  of  application  is  always  J  of  a  6  measured 
from  h. 

127.  It  is  intended  to  build  a  stone  wall  6  ft.  high 
to  dam  a  stream  of  water  to  a  depth  of  4  ft,,  the  width 
at  the  base  to  be  3  ft.,  the  top,  2  ft.  6  in.,  and  the  inner 
surface  is  vertical. 

Find  whether  the  wall  is  sufficiently  strong. 
Set  out  the  wall  and  depth  of  water  to  some  con- 
venient scale  (Fig.  67).     From  the  base  h  mark  off  6  c 
perpendicular  to  a  6  and  equal  to  4  ft.     Join  a  c.     The 
triangle  ab  c  represents  the  pressure  on  the  wall  (§125). 

Find  the  e.g.  of  a  6  c 

and    of    the    wall   as 

shown  in  Chapter  III. 

A  vertical  line  from 

the    e.g.    of    the   wall 

will       represent      the 

^'^^^J''^^    direction  of  the   force 

exerted    by     the   wall,     and     a    line 

perpendicular    to  the    inner     face    of 

the    wall  will  represent   the   direction 

of    the   force    exerted   by- the   water. 

Let  these  lines  intersect  at  0. 

To  find  the  magnitude  of  these 
forces,  a  portion  of  the  wall  and  of 
the  water,  1  ft.  each  in  length,  is  taken, 

2'  6"  +  3' 
then  the  wall  weighs  ^-  x  6' x  140  lbs.  =2310  lbs., 


and  the  water  weighs 


2 

4'x  4' 


62-5  lbs.  =  500  lbs. 


RETAINING   WALLS  75 

These  represent  the  magnitude  of  the  forces  acting 
in  the  directions  shown. 

From  o  scale  off  o  d  =  2Z10  lbs.,  and  from  d  draw 
d  e  =  500  lbs.  Join  o  e  ;  then  o  e  represents  the  magni- 
tude and  direction  of  the  resultant  force,  and  o  e  cuts 
the  base  of  the  wall  at  /. 

128.  To  fulfil  all  the  usual  conditions  necessary  for 
the  stability  of  a  retaining  wall  for  water,  the  resultant 
force  must  not  intersect  the  base  outside  the  middle 
third,  but  this  rule  is  not  universal  in  its  application. 

An  examination  of  Fig.  67  will  show  that  the  point  / 
is  within  the  middle  third,  hence  the  proposed  wall  will 
be  strong  enough. 

129.  A  retaining  wall  (brickwork)  7  ft.  high  has  a 
batter  of  1  in  8  on  the  outer  surface.  The  base  is  4  ft. 
and  the  top  1  ft.  thick. 

Ascertain  whether  it  is  safe  to  allow  the  water  to 
rise  to  a  depth  of  6  ft. 

Set  out  the  wall  to  scale,  and  indicate  the  water  line 
as  before  (Fig.  68). 

The  construction  is  similar  to  that  of  the  last  exercise. 

The  only  point  to  be  noted  is  that  h  c  and  the  centre 
of  pressure  of  the  water  still  remain  perpendicular 
to  a  b. 

The  lengtli  of  ab  is  obtained  by  scaling  it  on  the 
drawing. 

The  weight  of  the  wall  and  the  water  is  obtained  as 
shown  in  the  previous  exercise. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  resultant  falls  outside  the 
middle  third,  hence  the  wall  is  probably  not  strong 
enough  (§  128). 

Note. — The  question  of  stability  depends  partly  upon 
the  crushing  force  and  the  strength  of  material  at  the 


76         ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

outer  edge,  and  cases  may  occur  where  perfect  stability 
exists  although  the  resultant  may  pass  beyond  the 
middle  third. 

To  obtain  a  wall  strong  enough  the  thickness  should 
be  slightly  increased,  and  the  above  test  again  applied. 

130.  In   order   to   understand   the  thrust  caused   by 


a 


tl8J'5  Ik 


1 

-17 

.  A.^--' 

/             > 

tqbo  lis. 

Fig.  68. 


earth     on    a    retaining   wall    a    little   explanation   is 
necessary. 

If  a  bank  of  earth  be  left  exposed  to  the  weather, 
it  will  crumble  and  fall  until  it  forms  a  certain  natural 
slope  depending  upon  the  nature  of  the  earth  of  which 


RETAINESTG    WALLS 


77 


it   is    composed.     The    angle   which    this    slope   forms 
with  the  horizontal  plane  is  called  the  angle  of  repose. 
If  in  Fig.  69  A  B  shows  the  natural  slope,  then  ABC 
is  the  angle  of   repose. 

If  5  D  be  drawn  perpen-         D  L. A 

dicular    to     B   O,     the     77^  7  y^llllDin)!, 

angle  A  B  D  i^  the 
complement  of  the 
angle  A  B  G. 

It  has  been  shown  by 
several  writers  that  the 
portion  of  earth  which 
tends  to  break  away 
and  overturn  a  wall  is  that  enclosed  between  the 
vertical  line  B  D  from  the  foot  of  the  wall  and  the  line 
B  E  bisecting  the  complement  of  the  angle  of  repose, 
that  is,  in  Fig.  54,  the  portion  D  B  E. 

B  E  is  called  the  plane  of  rupture. 

In  order  that  the  portion  D  B  E  should  break  away, 
it  must  slide  down  the  plane  B  E,  acting  like  a  wedge 
on  B  D,  and  forcing  it  out  horizontally. 

It  was  shown  in  §  114  that  if  a  body  be  placed  on  an 
inclined  plane  a  certain  force  is  exerted  parallel  to  the 
plane.  Each  particle  of  the  mass  D  B  E  is  a,  body  on 
the  inclined  plane  B  E,  and  the  sum  of  them  may  be 
treated  as  if  concentrated  at  the  e.g.  of  D  B  E,  hence 
the  whole  mass  exerts  a  force  through  its  e.g.  parallel 
to  the  plane.  This  intercepts  B  D  at  F,  so  F  is  the 
point  of  application  of  the  force. 

This  point  is  always  J  the  distance  up  the  wall. 
D  B  E  is  evidently  prevented  from  sliding  by  the 
friction  of  the  plane  acting  uip  B  E  and  the  horizontal 
reaction  of  the  wall   applied  at  the   point  F.       This 


78        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC    STATICS 

reaction  must  be  equal  to  the  horizontal  thrust  of 
the  mass,  or  the  wall  will  be  forced  over. 

This  horizontal  thrust  is  obtained  by  resolving  the 
vertical  force  exerted  by  the  mass  D  B  E  in  sl  horizontal 
direction  and  one  parallel  to  the  plane. 

131.  A  stone  wall  is  built  to  retain  a  bank  of  ordinary 


Scales 

Lm&al. 


1  z  s 

I 


/    >r     1000 


Force. 
0 


1000 


Uh 


Fig.   70. 


earth  8  ft.  high  and  estimated  to  weigh  120  lbs.  per 
cub.  ft.  The  base  of  the  wall  is  2'  6'',  the  batter  of  the 
outer  face  is  1  in  8,  and  the  inner  face  vertical. 

If  the  angle  of  repose  be  45°,  determine  the  position 
of  the  resultant  force. 

Set  out  the  wall  to  scale  as  shown  in  Fig.  70.  Draw 
the  angle  of  repose  and  bisect  the  complement  ABC 


I 


RETAINING    WALLS  79 

with  the  line  B  D.  A  B  D  now  represents  the  mass 
of  earth  whose  horizontal  thrust  has  to  be  determined. 

Through  the  c.g.'s  of  the  wall  and  oi  A  B  D  draw 
vertical  lines.  From  E,  the  point  of  application  of 
the  force  exerted  hy  A  B  D  (which,  as  shown  before, 
is  J  of  ^^)  draw  a  horizontal  line  to  intercept  these 
vertical  lines  at  F  and  G. 

The  weight  of  1  ft.  length  of  the  wall  is  2240  lbs., 
and  1  ft.  length  of  the  section  A  B  D  weighs  1600 
lbs.     . 

From  G,  on  the  line  passing  through  the  e.g.  of 
A  B  D,  measure  G  H  equal  to  the  vertical  force  exerted 
by  AB  D,  i.e.  =  1600  lbs.  From  H  draw  a  line 
parallel  to  B  D,  meeting  the  line  G  F  Sit  I.  G  I  now 
represents  the  magnitude  and  direction  of  the  thrust 
oi  A  B  D,  and  its  point  of  application  is  E. 

This  line  meets  the  line  of  action  of  the  force  exerted 
by  the  wall  at  F.  From  F  scale  oS  F  J  equal  to  this 
force,  i.e.  equal  to  2240  lbs.,  and  from  J  draw  J  K 
equal  and  parallel  to  the  thrust  G  I.     Join  F  K. 

F  K  now  represents  the  magnitude  and  direction  of 
the  resultant  thrust. 

This  meets  the  base  of  the  wall  at  L. 

132.  If  this  resultant  crosses  the  base  of  the  wall  at 
any  point  between  B  and  0,  the  wall  is  safe  from  over- 
turning ;  if  it  passes  through  0,  the  wall  is  on  the  point 
of  overturning  ;  and  if  it  passes  outside  the  point  0, 
the  wall  will  be  overthrown,  unless  the  tensile  strength 
at  the  inner  edge  is  sufficient  to  prevent  it. 

133.  In  considering  the  stability  of  retaining  walls, 
there  is  another  point  which  it  may  be  well  to  point 
out,  but  the  explanation  of  which  is  beyond  this  work. 

The  removal  of  the  resultant  force  from  the  centre 


80        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


causes  the  pressure  on  the  outer  edge  to  be  much  in- 
creased, and  the  nearer  it  is  to  the  edge  the  greater  is 
this  pressure. 

The  pressure  at  this  point  must  not  be  greater  than 
the  material  of  which  the  wall  is  composed  can  safely 
bear,  or  the  wall  will  fail  by  crushing. 

134.  Polygon  of  Forces. — Let  Fig.  71  represent 
four  forces  of  which  the  magnitude  and  direction  of 

two  are  known.  It  is 
required  to  determine 
the  other  forces. 

Draw  a  h  and  6  c  to 
represent  the  forces  A  B 
and  B  G.     Join  c  a. 

c  a  is  now  the  equi- 
librant  of  the  two 
known  forces  (§  105),  therefore  a  c  is  the  resultant 
(§  106),  and  we  may  consider  this  as  being  substituted 
for  ^  ^  and  5  C. 

We  have  now  three  forces  (the  resultant  of  the  first 
two,  and  the  two  unknown  ones)  of  which  one,  a  c,  is 
known,  therefore  we  can  find  the  other  two. 

From  c  draw  a  line  parallel  to  G  D,  and  from  a  one 
parallel  to  A  D.  Let  them  meet  at  d.  Then  c  d  and 
da  will  give  the  magnitude  and  direction  oi  G  D  and 
DA. 

It  should  be  noticed  that  this  result  could  be  arrived 
at  without  finding  the  resultant,  by  drawing  the  lines 
c  d  and  d  a  from  the  ends  of  the  lines  representing  the 
two  other  forces.  This  latter  method  is  the  more  direct, 
and  is  usually  adopted. 

135.  Fig.  72  represents  five  forces  in  equilibrium,  of 
which  three  are  known. 


POLYGON    OF   FORCES 


81 


It  is  necessary  to  find  the  magnitude  of  the  other 
two,  and  the  direction  in  which  they  act. 

Draw  6  c  to  represent 
B  G  in  direction  and  ^^' 

magnitude,  from  c  draw 
c  d  representing  C  D  in 
direction  and  magni- 
tude, taking  care  that 
the  sense  of  each  force 
is  in  the  same  direction  round  the  figure,  and  from  d  draw 
^  e  to  represent  D  E  in  direction  and  magnitude,  again 
noting  that  the  force  acts  in  the  direction  of  d  to  e. 

From  b  draw  a  fine  parallel  to  ^  -B  and  from  e  a  line 
parallel  to  E  A.  Let  them  meet  at  a.  ea  and  ab 
now  represent  the  magnitude  oi  E  A  and  A  B,  and,  as  the 
sense  of  the  forces  must  form  a  circuit  round  the  polygon, 
eto  a  and  a  to  b  are  their  respective  directions,  i.e.  E  A 
acts  upwards,  and  A  B  upwards  towards  the  right. 

136.  From  the  polygon  of  forces  the  resultant  of  any 
number  of  forces  can  readily  be  obtained. 

Let  it  be  required  to  find  the  resultant  of  ^  ^  and 
BG  (Fig.  72).  The  first  and  last  letters  of  the  names 
of  these  forces  in  clockwise  order  are  A  and  G.  On  the 
force  diagram  join  a  and  c.  Then  a  c  fully  represents 
the  resultant,  that  is,  the  line  a  c  gives  its  magnitude, 
and  its  direction  is  from  a  to  c. 

Had  it  been  required  to  find  the  resultant  of  the 
other  three  forces,  the  first  and  last  letters  would  have 
been  G  and  A  respectively.  The  resultant  force  would 
in  this  case  be  represented  by  c  a,  that  is,  its  magnitude 
is  the  same  but  its  direction  is  from  c  to  a. 

137.  For  the  solution  of  forces  acting  at  a  point  and 
maintaining  equilibrium,  there  must  not  be  more  than 


82        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


two  unknown  ones,  and  of  these  two,  if  the  direction 
be  known  then  the  magnitude  can  be  found,  and,  if 
the  magnitudes  be  known,  the  directions  can  be  found. 

138.  If  a  number  of  forces  keep  a  body  in  equilibrium, 
the  polygon  representing  the  forces  (i.e.  the  force 
diagram)  must  close,  and  the  senses  be  concurrent. 

139.  If  one  of  the  senses  of  the  forces  in  a  closed 
force  diagram  be  opposed  to  the  others,  the  force  repre- 
sented by  it  is  the  resultant  of  the  others. 

140.  If  the  force  diagram  does  not  close,  then  the 
system  which  it  ^:epresents  is  not  in  equilibrium,  and  the 
closing  line  would  represent  the  magnitude  and  direction 
of  the  resultant,  but  its  sense  would  be  non-concurrent. 

Examples  to  Chapter  IV 
1.  What  does  A  G  (Fig.  1)  represent  ? 

What  would  it  be  called  if 
its  direction  were  reversed  ? 

2.  What  is  meant  by  the 
"  resultant  of  two  forces  ?  " 

3.  If  two  forces,  equal  to 
5  lbs.  and  8  lbs.  respectively, 

act  towards  a  point  at  an  angle  with  each  other  of  120°, 
what  force  is  required  to  produce  equihbrium  ? 

4.  Fig.  2  represents  a  piece  of 
cord  attached  to  opposite  sides  of  a 
room,  and  supporting  a  weight. 

Find  the  tension  in  each  sec- 
tion of  the  cord. 

5.  A  ladder  weighing  150  lbs. 
Ex.  Ch.  IV.— Fig.  2.  ^^g^g  against  a  smooth  vertical 
wall  at  an  angle  of  60°  with  the  horizontal  plane. 

Find  the  direction  and  magnitude  of  the  reaction  of 
the  ground. 


EXAMPLES    TO    CHAPTER    IV 


83 


6.  A  rafter,  inclined  at  30°  with  the  horizontal  plane, 
exerts  a  force  equal  to  200  lbs. 

Find   the   vertical   and  horizontal   reactions   of    the 
wall  supporting  it. 

7.  A    door    is    T  x  3'    6'',  and 
weighs  250  lbs.      The  hinges  are 
T   and    12''    from    the    top    and    r| 
bottom  respectively. 

Find  the  horizontal  reaction  of 
the  bottom  hinge,  and  the  total 
reaction  of  the  top  one. 

8.  Fig.  3  illustrates  a  bracket 
supporting  a  weight  of  60  lbs. 

{a)  Find  the  amount  and  kind 
of  stress  in  the  horizontal  and 
inclined  members. 

(h)  Also  find  the  reactions  A  and  B. 


215 


•*   2-0'  -» 
Ex.  Ch.  IV. 


-Fig.  4. 


Ex.  Ch.  IV.— Fig.  5. 


9.  Fig.  4  shows  a  retaining  wall  supporting  a  bank 
of  earth.  The  earth  weighs  120  lbs.  per  cub.  ft.,  and 
its  angle  of  repose  is  45°. 

If  the  wall  weighs  140  lbs.  per  cub.  ft.,  where  does 
the  resultant  pressure  intercept  the  base  of  the  wall  ? 

10.  Fig.  5  represents  five  forces  in  equilibrium. 
Find  the  magnitudes  and  directions  of  ^4  ^  and  B  C, 
What  is  the  resultant  of  the  three  given  forces  ? 


Chapter  V 
THE    FUNICULAR    POLYGON 

141.  The  Funicular  Polygon. — If  a  system  of 
forces  in  equilibrium  be  applied  to  a  body  already  at 
rest,  then  that  body  will  still  remain  at  rest  (§  32). 

Let  five  forces  in  equilibrium  be  applied  to  a  jointed 
frame  as  shown  in  Fig.  73. 

This  frame  is  supposed  to  be  such  that  each  bar  (or 


Fig.  73. 

link  as  it  is  called)  will  stand  either  tension  or  compres- 
sion, and  each  joint  (or  node)  is  supposed  to  be  hinged 
so  that  the  bars  will  accommodate  themselves  to  the 
best  position  to  withstand  the  forces  applied  to  them. 

Such  a  frame  is  called  a  funicular  polygon,  and  must 
always  close. 

Let  the  force  ^  jB  be  known. 

As  the  whole  frame  is  in  equilibrium,  each  node  is 
in  equilibrium,  and  the  node  on  which  A  B  in  acting 


THE    FUNICULAE  POLYGON 


85 


IS  maintained  in  equilibrium  by  the  action  of  that 
force  and  the  stresses  set  up  in  B  0  and  0  A .  Draw 
a  b  equal  and  parallel  to  the  force  A  B,  and  draw  lines 
from  a  and  b  parallel  to  B  0  and  0  A .  Then  b  o  and  o  a 
will  represent  the  direction  and  magnitude  of  the 
stresses  set  up  in  the  links  B  0  and  0  A .  But  at  the 
other  end  each  link  will  exert  an  equal  and  opposite 
force  (§  92).  Taking  the  node  where  B  C  acts,  we  have 
three  forces,  but  0  B  has  just  been  found  and  is  repre- 
sented in  direction  and  magnitude  by  o  6.  By  drawing 
parallel  to  B  G  and  C  0,  b  c  and  c  o  are  obtained,  and 
these  represent  the  force  B  C  and  the  stress  set  up  in 
G  0.  Proceeding  to  the  next  node,  by  means  of  o  c,  cd 
or  the  force  G  D  and  the  stress  d  o  in  the  next  bar  are 
ascertained.  By  repeating  this  operation  the  whole  of 
the  forces  and  the  stresses  in  the  bars  are  obtained. 

When  completed  it  will  be  seen  that  the  lines  repre- 
senting the  forces  form  a  closed  polygon,  proving  that 
the  forces  represented  by  these  lines  are  in  equilibrium. 

142.  Further,  the  lines  representing  the  stresses  in 
the  links  all  meet  at  the  same  point.  This  point  is 
called  the  pole,  and  the  lines  radiating  from  it  polar 
lines  or  vectors. 

143.  If  all  the  forces  applied  to  a  funicular  polygon, 
and  the  direction  of  two  of  the  links  be  known,  then  the 
funicular  polygon  can  be  completed,  because  from  the 
forces  the  force  diagram  can  be  formed  and  the  inter- 
section of  the  two  lines  parallel  to  these  two  links  will 
give  the  pole.  The  directions  of  the  remaining  links 
are  obtained  by  drawing  the  other  vector  lines. 

144.  If  a  system  of  forces  be  in  equilibrium  any 
funicular  polygon  can  be  found  to  which  they  can  be 
applied. 


86 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


For,  let  ah  cd  e  (Fig.  74  (a))  be  a  reproduction  of  the 
force  diagram  Fig.  73. 


Fig.  74. 

Take  any  pole  o  and  draw  the  vectors. 

Draw  AB,  BO  and  0  A  (Fig.  74  (b))  parallel  to  a  b, 
b  o,  and  o  a.  Mark  off  5  0  any  length,  and  at  its  extre- 
mity draw  B  C  and  C  0  parallel  to  6  c  and  c  o.  Cut  off 
C  0  any  length,  and  draw  C  D  and  D  0  parallel  to  c  d 
and  d  o.  Set  off  Z)  0  any  length,  and  draw  D  E  and  E  0 
parallel  to  d  e  and  e  o.  Produce  ^  0  and  ^  0  to  meet, 
and  from  this  point  draw  a  line  E  A  parallel  to  e  a. 

Fig.  74  {b)  now  represents  the  same  five  forces  as 
those  in  Fig.  73,  but  they  are  applied  to  another  funicular 
polygon. 

Hence,  if  a  system  of  forces  be  in  equilibrium  and  a 
force  diagram  drawn,  any  pole  can  be  taken,  and  a 
funicular  polygon  found  in  respect  of  that  pole. 

145.  Fig.  75  shows  a  funicular  polygon  and  the  forces 
applied. 

It  is  necessary  to  find  how  equilibrium  may  be  main- 
tained in  each  part  if  a  section  be  taken  at  x  y. 

It  is  evident  that  the  forces  on  one  side  of  the  section 


THE    FUNICULAR  POLYGON 


87 


are  kept  in  position  by  those  on  the  other,  hence  the 
resultant  of  the  forces  on  the  one  side  will  maintain 
equilibrium  with  the  forces  on  the  other. 

Draw  the  force  diagram  ab  cd  e. 

The  forces  on  the  left  are  E  A  and  A  B.  Join  e  6, 
then  e  &  is  the  magnitude  of  the  resultant,  and  e  to  &  its 
direction.     (§  136.) 

It  is  now  necessary  to  find  where  this  resultant  acts. 
By  substituting  the  resultant  e  h  for  the  two  forces  E  A 
and  A  B  the  force  diagram  eb  cd  e  is  obtained.     But  o 

X 


is  a  pole  from  which  the  vectors  ob,  o  c,  o  d  and  o  e  are 
already  drawn,  hence  a  funicular  polygon  may  be 
obtained  whose  sides  are  parallel  to  these  vectors.  On 
examination  it  will  be  seen  that  0  B,  0  C,  0  D  and  0  E 
are  already  parallel  to  ob,  oc,  o  d  and  o  e  respectively, 
but  a  funicular  polygon  must  close,  hence  0  B  and  0  E 
must  be  produced  to  meet. 

There  must  be  a  force  acting  at  each  node  of  a  funi- 
cular polygon,  and  each  of  the  forces  B  C,  C  D  and  D  E 
are  already  acting  at  a  node,  hence  the  remaining  force, 


88        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

which  is  represented  by  e  h,  must  act  at  the  node  formed 
by  the  production  of  these  Hnes. 

Again,  the  resultant  of  the  forces  B  C,  C  D  and  D  E 
is  h  e,  that  is,  the  resultant  of  the  forces  on  the  right  of 
the  section  is  of  the  same  magnitude  as  the  resultant  of 
the  forces  on  the  left,  but  it  acts  in  the  opposite  direction, 
and  by  obtaining  a  new  funicular  polygon  as  before,  it 
will  be  found  to  act  through  the  same  point. 

146.  Hence,  if  a  section  be  taken  across  a  funicular 
polygon,  the  resultant  of  the  forces  on  either  side  will 
act  through  the  node  formed  by  the  production  of  the 
intersected  sides,  and  the  magnitude  and  direction  of 
each  resultant  are  found  by  the  force  diagram ;  also,  the 
resultant  of  all  the  forces  on  one  side  of  the  section  is 
equal  to  the  resultant  of  all  the  forces  on  the  other  side, 
but  they  act  in  opposite  directions. 

147.  Similarly  the  resultant  of  any  of  the  forces  and 
a  point  in  its  line  of  action  may  be  obtained.  Deter- 
mine the  resultant  of  CD,  DE  and  E  A  (Fig.  75). 
C  and  A  are  the  first  and  last  letters  in  the  clockwise 
notation,  so  c  a  on  the  force  diagram  gives  the  resultant, 
and  it  acts  through  the  point  where  the  links  C  0  and 
A  0  would  meet  if  produced. 

This  is  practically  the  same  thing  as  taking  a  section 
cutting  the  links  G  0  and  A  0. 

148.  Therefore  it  should  be  noticed,  that  the  first  and 
last  letters  of  the  forces,  when  named  in  clockwise  order, 
not  only  give  the  magnitude  and  direction  of  the  resul- 
tant force  on  the  force  diagram,  but  also  name  the  links 
on  the  funicular  polygon  whose  intersection,  when 
produced,  gives  a  point  in  the  line  of  action  of  tliat 
resultant. 

149.  Before   applying  parallel  forces  to  a  funicular 


THE    FUNICULAR   POLYGON 


89 


1b1 


polygon,  a  little  explanation  of  the  force  diagram  may 
not  be  out  of  place. 

If  the  system  be  in  equilibrium  the  force  diagram 
must  close.     (§  138.) 

Suppose  a  beam  loaded 
and  supported  as  shown 
in  Pig.  76. 

Draw  a  b,  b  c  and  c  d 
to  represent  the  known 
forces  A  B,  B  C  and 
CD. 

From   d  draw  a   line 
parallel  to  D  E,  and  from   a  one  parallel  to  A  E.    de 
and  e  a  give  the  magnitude  and  direction  of  the  force 
exerted  by  the  two  supports. 

Suppose  D  E  and  E  A  to  be  vertical,  as  shown  in 
Fig.  77,  then  it  is  evident  that  the  lines  d  e  and  e  a  will 
be  in  a  straight  line  and 


Fig.  76. 


Ul  c  I 


D 


Fig.  77. 


lie  upon  d  a,  i.e.  d  a  will 
be  the  closing  line  of  the 
force  diagram,  but  the 
point  of  intersection  is  not 
known,  hence  the  reactions 
of  the  two  supports  are 
equal  to  the  total  load 
a  d,  but  what  proportion  each  bears  is  not  determined. 

The  point  e  will,  however,  lie  somewhere  between 
a  and  d,  and  abcda  (Fig.  77)  will  form  a  closed  poly- 
gon in  quite  the  same  sense  asab  cd  ea  (Fig.  76). 

Hence,  the  force  diagram  of  a  system  of  parallel  forces 
is  a  straight  line. 

150.  We  will  now  proceed  to  utilize  the  funicular 
polygon  to  determine  parallel  forces. 


90 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


The  most  common  case  is  that  of  a  simple  beam  loaded 
at  various  points. 

Two  scales  are  necessary — a  lineal  scale  to  set  out  the 
beam  and  the  positions  of  the  loads,  and  a  force  scale 
for  all  the  measurements  on  the  force  diagram.  Fig.  78 
shows  a  beam  with  the  position  and  amount  of  each  load. 

Taking  a  convenient  force  scale  ah =3  cwts.,  6  c= 
2  cwts.,  and  c  d=5  cwts.  ;  a  d  is  now  the  sum  of  the 

5  cwts.      2  cwts.       Scwts 


R-eb 


Fig.  78 


TO  0 

Lineal    rTTTilMMI 


1  0    Z     1^    6    S    10  12  Ik 

Force,    mill  I  I  i  I 


I  II  I  I  I  II  niLcwfe. 


loads,  and  the  sum  of  the  reactions  is  equal  to  this,  there- 
fore dais  the  closing  line  of  the  force  diagram. 

It  is  necessary  to  determine  the  position  of  e  to  ascer- 
tain what  proportion  of  the  load  is  borne  by  each 
support. 

Take  any  pole  o  and  draw  vectors  to  a,  6,  c  and  d. 

From  any  point  on  the  support  EA  draw  a  line 
1-2  parallel  to  a  o  until  it  cuts  a  perpendicular  from  the 
first  load.  From  the  point  2  the  line  2-3  is  drawn  parallel 
to  6  o  until  it  intersects  the  perpendicular  from   the 


THE    FUNICULAR   POLYGON  91 

second  load.  From  3  the  line  3-4  is  drawn  parallel  to 
c  0,  till  it  meets  the  line  of  action  of  the  third  force,  and 
from  this  point  the  line  4-5  is  drawn  parallel  to  cZ  o  as  far 
as  the  support.     Join  1  and  5. 

123451  is  now  a  funicular  polygon,  and  to  enable  the 
student  to  compare  it  with  the  others,  the  forces  are 
shown  dotted  at  the  nodes. 

An  examination  of  the  funicular  polygon  will  show 
that  it  has  five  sides,  whereas  there  are  only  four  vectors. 
A  vector  must  now  be  drawn  parallel  to  the  remaining 
side  of  the  polygon,  and  this  determines  the  position  of  e. 

d  e  now  represents  the  magnitude  and  direction  of 
the  reaction  D  E,  and  e  a  that  oi  E  A. 

151.  It  will  be  necessary  to  know  the  names  of  the 
links  of  the  funicular  polygon.  The  one  parallel  to  a  0 
is  A  0,  the  one  parallel  to  b  o  is  B  0,  and  so  on.  It  is 
not  necessary  to  put  the  names  on  the  polygon,  because  a 
glance  at  the  force  diagram  will  at  once  supply  them. 

152.  The  name  of  each  link  may  also  be  ascertained 
by  referring  to  the  beam. 

As  each  link  is  terminated  by  the  lines  of  action  of 
some  two  forces,  it  has,  as  its  distinguishing  letter,  the 
one  which  names  the  space  on  the  beam  between  those 
two  forces.  Thus  the  space  between  the  3  and  2  cwts. 
is  B.  The  link  terminated  by  the  perpendiculars  from 
these  two  forces  is  known  as  B  0. 

Again,  the  space  E  extends  from  the  one  support  to 
the  other,  and  the  link  which  crosses  this  space  is  E  0. 

153.  Find  the  resultant  oi  A  B  and  B  C  (Fig.  78)  and 
a  point  in  its  line  of  action. 

The  first  and  last  letters  in  the  clockwise  sequence  are 
A  and  C,  therefore  a  c  on  the  force  diagram  gives  the 
resultant  force,  which  is  5  cwts.,  and  the  intersection  of 


92         ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC    STATICS 

the  links  A  0  and  C  0  gives  the  point  x  through  which 
it  acts. 

A  perpendicular  from  x  gives  the  point  on  the  beam 
where  it  acts. 

154.  Find  a  point  on  the  beam  where  the  three  forces 
(Fig.  78)  could  be  accumulated  without  interfering  with 
the  reactions. 

This  is  practically  asking  for  the  resultant  of  the  three 
forces  and  its  point  of  application. 

The  three  forces  are  A  B,  B  C  and  C  D,  therefore  a  d 
gives  the  magnitude  and  direction  of  the  resultant  force, 
and  y  the  intersection  of  the  links  A  0  and  D  0  gives  a 
point  in  its  line  of  action.  A  perpendicular  to  the  beam 
from  y  will  give  the  point  where  the  10  cwts.  would  be 
placed. 

155.  Ascertain  the  force  which  could  be  substituted 
for  A  B  and  the  reaction  on  the  left,  and  the  point  where 
it  should  be  applied. 

The  sequence  is  E  A  and  A  B,  hence  e  b  on  the  force 
diagram  gives  the  direction  and  magnitude  of  the  force, 
and  z,  where  the  links  E  0  and  B  0  meet,  is  a  point 
through  which  it  acts. 

Of  course,  the  student  should  note  that,  having  drawn 
the  lines  of  action  of  these  resultant  forces  through  the 
beam,  the  distance  of  these  points  from  either  end  can 
be  obtained  by  applying  the  lineal  scale. 

156.  It  was  pointed  out  in  Chapter  II  that  questions 
on  the  three  orders  of  levers  could  be  solved  by  means  of 
similar  triangles. 

The  knowledge  of  the  funicular  polygon  supplies  an 
easier  and  more  interesting  method  of  solving  them,  as 
the  following  examples  will  show  : 

A  lever  of  the  first  order  supports  a  weight  of  60  lbs., 


LEVERS 


93 


r  6''  from  the  fulcrum.  Find  the  power  necessary  to 
balance  this  if  the  power  arm  be  2  ft. 

Set  out  the  lever  with  the  position  of  the  weight,  etc., 
to  a  convenient  lineal  scale  (Fig.  79)  and  adopt  a  force 
scale. 

Draw  a  6=60  lbs.,  and  take  any  pole  o.  Join  a  o  and 
b  o.  Draw  the  link  A  0  across  the  space  A,  and  the 
link  B  0  across  the  space  B,  and  parallel  to  a  o  and  b  o 
respectively.  Close  the  polygon,  and  draw  the  vector 
c  0  parallel  to  the  closing  line.     Let  o  c  terminate  in  a  6 

i  B  I 


t 


-•^ 


Fig.  79. 

produced.  Then  6  c  is  the  required  power,  which  is 
45  lbs. 

157.  A  lever  is  6  ft.  long.  Where  is  the  fulcrum  if  a 
force  of  15  lbs.  supports  a  weight  of  50  lbs.  ? 

Draw  the  lever =6'  (Fig.  80)  and  with  a  convenient 
force  scale  draw  a  6=50  lbs.  and  b  c—l5  lbs.  Join  a,  b, 
and  c  to  any  pole  o.  Draw  the  link  B  0  across  the  space 
B  and  parallel  to  6  o.  From  the  ends  of  this  draw  the 
links  A  0  and  G  0  parallel  to  a  o  and  c  o  and  across  the 
spaces  A  and  C  respectively. 

A  perpendicular  from  the  point  of  intersection  of 
these  links  will  give  the  position  of  the  fulcrum. 


94        ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


i 


B 


i 


t 


;    b 


Fig.  80. 

158.  Fig.  81  shows  a  lever  wdth  the  relative  positions 
of  the  fulcrum,  weight,  and  power. 

What  weight  will  a  power  equal  to  24  lbs.  sustain  ? 

Draw  c  a=:24  lbs.  Take  a  pole  and  draw  the  vectors 
c  o  and  a  0.  Across  the  space  A  draw  the  link  A  0 
parallel  to  a  0,  and  across  the  space  C  the  link  C  0 
parallel  to  c  o. 

Close  the  polygon,  and  draw  o  h  parallel  to  the  link 
B  0  thus  formed. 

a  h  represents  the  weight  drawn  to  scale. 


W 


Fig.  81. 


159.  A  lever  6  ft.  long,  weighs  20  lbs.  If  a  weight  of 
80  lbs.  be  placed  2  ft.  from  the  fulcrum,  which  is  at  the 
end,  find  the  power  necessary  at  the  other  end  to  support 
it.     The  weight  of  the  lever  acts  at  its  centre  of  gravity. 


FUNICULAR   POLYGON 


95 


Fig.  82  shows  the  lever  and  the  position  of  the  forces. 

Draw  the  forces  a  h  and  h  c  and  the  three  vectors. 

Draw  the  Hnks  as  before,  and  close  the  polygon.  The 
closing  line  indicates  how  the  vector  o  c?  is  to  be  drawn. 

c  dis  the  power  drawn  to  scale. 

1 60.  Reactions  of  the  supports  of  framed  struc- 
tures.— It  should  be  noted  in  the  case  of  a  simple  beam 
that  the  proportion  of  a  load  borne  by  each  support  is  in 
the  inverse  ratio  to  the  perpendicular  distance  of  its 
line  of  action  from  the  support. 


SO  Ik.   20  lbs 


h 


Fig.  82. 

The  same  rule  holds  good  for  framed  structures  of 
every  description,  hence  the  reactions  on  their  supports 
can  be  found  in  a  similar  manner. 

To  prove  this  we  will  take  one  simple  example  and 
compare  the  results  arrived  at  graphically  and  arith- 
metically. 

Fig.  83  illustrates  a  roof  truss  with  a  load  of  6  cwts.  at 
the  ridge. 

The  reactions  B  C  and  C  A  are  given  by  6  c  and  c  a  on 
the  force  diagram,  which  are  found  to  represent  3 J  cwts. 
and  2\  cwts.  respectively. 

161.  The  span  shown  in  the  figure  is  12  ft.  and  the 


96         ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


line  of  action  of  the  6  cwts.  is  7  ft.  from  x  and  5  ft.  from  y. 

Taking  the  moments  about  x,  we  have  the  reaction 

of   5Cxl2'=6   cwts.  X  7',    therefore   the    reaction   of 

6  cwts.  X  7'  ,      ,  .        1 

B  G= ^-7 =3J  cwts.  ;  and  taking  the  moments 

about  y,  we  have  the  reaction  of  C  ^  x  12' =6  cwts.  x  5', 

6  cwts.  x  5' 


therefore  the  reaction  of  C  ^ 


12' 


=2J  cwts. 


Fig.  83. 

It  will  thus  be  seen  that  the  results  obtained  graphi- 
cally correspond  with  those  found  arithmetically. 

162.  The  advantage  of  the  graphic  method  over  the 
arithmetical  one  for  finding  the  reactions  of  the  sup- 
ports is  quite  apparent,  when  it  is  pointed  out  that  the 
former  method  is  the  same  for  all  kinds  of  structures, 
whereas  the  latter  often  involves  difficult  calculations. 

In  order  to  show  the  application  of  the  graphic 
method  a  few  typical  cases  are  given.  As  the  method 
of  procedure  is  exactly  the  same  as  that  for  a  simple 
beam,  only  the  points  not  previously  noted  will  be 
commented  upon. 


REACTION    OF    SUPPORTS 


97 


163.  Suppose  a  truss  as  shown  in  Fig.  84  carrying  an 
evenly  distributed  load  of  3  tons  on  the  top  beam. 

Find  the  reactions  at  the  supports. 

As  the  load  is  evenly  distributed  along  the  entire 
length  of  the  beam,  it  may  be  considered  as  being 
accumulated  at  its  centre,  or  as  being  transmitted  by 
the  beam  to  the  joints,  one-half  being  on  each. 

J  \tons.  li  \tons 

A 


nitons 


Both  cases  are  worked  out,  and  it  should  be  noticed 
that  the  result  is  the  same  in  each  case. 

A 


I 

^m        Fjg.  85  shows  a  Warren  girder  witli  three  loads  on 
^B    the  bottom  boom. 

L 


98 


ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OP   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


Fig.  86  is  a  diagram  of  a  short  N  girder  with  two  loads 
on  the  top  boom. 

164.  Before  proceeding  with  the  roof  truss  it  is  neces- 
sary to  understand  what  the  load  is  composed  of,  and 
how  it  is  transmitted  to  the  truss. 

The  load  consists  of  the  weight  of  the  truss  itself,  the 
weight  of  the  covering,  snow,  and  wind  pressure.  The 
weight  of  the  covering  depends  on  its  nature.  The 
wind  pressure  is  not  vertical,  but  its  vertical  component 
can  be  found. 

n      [tons)  B     ytons. 


Fig.  86. 


The  student  may  assume  that  the  total  vertical  load 
on  a  roof  is  56  lbs.  per  square  foot  of  the  external  sloping 
surfaces. 

Suppose  a  space  30'  x  24'  to  be  roofed.     Fig.  87. 

This  would  necessitate  two  king-post  trusses  at  10' 
centres.  These  with  the  ridge  and  purlins  would  divide 
the  roof  into  12  equal  spaces. 

Taking  the  rise  to  be  J  of  the  span,  the  slope  would 
measure  nearly  14 J  ft.  The  area  of  each  slope  would 
be  14i'x30'=435  sq.ft. 

The  total  weight  would  then  be  (2  x  435)  half  cwts., 
or  435  cwts. 


WEIGHT    ON    ROOF   TRUSS 


99 


This  is  spread  over  12  spaces,  so  the  weight  of  each 

435 

cwts.=:36J  cwts. 


12 

Taking  the  spaces  A  and  D,  the  common  rafters 
transmit  half  of  the  loads  to  the  wall-plates  and  half 
to  the  purlins.  Taking  the  spaces  B  and  C,  half  the 
weight  on  each  is  transmitted  to  the  purlins,  and  the 


■^///////y////////////rrA  r////////////777:^.^/. -'^  Vy'.'.v///////^//////  ^//. 


1 


D 


B 


Fig.  87. 


< 


her  half  to  the  ridge.  Thus  the  ridge  and  each  purlin 
et  36J  cwts.  and  each  wall-plate  18J  cwts. 
But  the  purlins  and  ridge  are  beams  with  distributed 
ads,  one  end  of  each  being  supported  by  the  wall,  and 
the  other  by  the  truss,  hence  the  truss  supports  half  the 
load  on  each.  In  the  same  manner  it  can  be  shown 
that  the  same  truss  supports  a  like  amount  from  the 
adjoining  spaces. 

Therefore,  in  the  above  example,  the  purlins  and  ridge 


ft 


100     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF    GRAPHIC    STATICS 

transmit  36 J  cwts.  each  to  the  truss  and  18  J  cwts. 
comes  directly  on  each  wall,  and  the  ridge,  purlins,  and 
walls  are  the  points  of  application  of  these  loads. 

165.  If  the  roof  be  symmetrically  planned,  the  magni- 
tude of  the  loads  at  the  different  points  of  the  truss  can 
be  obtained  as  follows  : — 

Divide  the  total  weight  of  the  roof  by  the  number  of 
spaces  into  which  the  trusses  divide  it,  and  the  weight 
thus  obtained  is  again  divided,  so  that  each  purlin  and 
ridge  gets  twice  as  much  as  each  wall. 

166.  If  a  roof  truss  be  symmetrical  and  symmetri- 
cally loaded,  the  reactions  of  the  supports  will  be  equal, 
each  equal  to  half  the  sum  of  the  loads. 


Fig.  88. 


167.  As  an  application  of  the  funicular  polygon  to  a 
roof  truss  Fig.  88  is  given.  It  shows  a  total  load  of  50 
cwts.  on  one  side,  and  a  load  of  40  cwts.  on  the  other. 

It  should  be  carefully  noted  how  these  loads  are 
applied  to  the  truss. 


I 


KE ACTIONS    OF    SUPPORTS  101 

Letter  the  spaces  between  the  external  forces,  and 
draw  the  line  of  loads  ah  cd  ef. 

The  loads  A  B  and  E  F  come  directly  on  the  wall,  and 
are  entirely  independent  of  the  truss. 

What  we  have  to  find  out  is  what  proportion  of  the 
loads  EC,  C  D  and  D  E  each  wall  bears,  and  for  this 
purpose  our  line  of  loads  \^h  cd  e. 

Take  a  pole  and  join  6,  c,  d,  and  e  to  it.  Make  a 
funicular  polygon  with  the  links  parallel  to  these  vectors, 
and  draw  o  g  parallel  to  the  closing  link. 

e  g  now  represents  the  proportion  of  the  three  loads 
borne  by  the  wall  F  G,  but  in  addition  to  this,  it  sup- 
ports the  load  E  F  which  is  represented  by  e  /,  therefore 
the  total  reaction  of  the  wall  F  G  is  shown  by  the 
line  /  g. 

Similarly  g  a  represents  the  total  reaction  of  the 
wall  G  A. 

1 68.  Since  the  resultant  of  all  the  forces  exerted  by 
a  body  passes  through  its  e.g.,  and  since  the  funicular 
polygon  proves  the  most  convenient  method  of  obtain- 
ing the  resultant  of  a  number  of  parallel  forces,  it  can 
be  applied  to  find  the  e.g.  of  a  body  which  has  to  be 
divided  into  a  number  of  segments. 

Suppose  it  is  required  to  find  the  e.g.  of  the  section 
shown  in  Fig.  89. 

Divide  the  figure  into  three  parts  as  shown,  and  find 
the  e.g.  of  each  portion.     The  weight  of  each  part  may 

I  now  be  considered  as  accumulated  at  its  e.g.,  and  acting 
in  a  vertical  direction. 
Through  the  e.g.  of  each  draw  vertical  lines.     D  E 
now  gives  the  line  of  action  of  a  force  which  is  equal  to 
the  weight  of  the  bottom  portion  ;  E  F  gives  the  line  of 


102     ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


S   c: 


t, 


Fig.  89 


EXAMPLES    TO   CHAPTER    V  103 

middle  portion  ;  and  F  0  the  line  of  action  of  a  force 
equal  to  the  weight  of  the  top  portion. 

Draw  a  force  diagram  making  d  e  equal  to  the  weight 
of  the  bottom  portion,  e  f  equal  to  the  weight  of  the 
middle  portion,  and  /  g  equal  to  that  of  the  top  portion. 
Take  any  pole  and  draw  the  funicular  polygon. 

The  forces  are  represented  by  D  E,  E  F,  and  F  O, 
therefore  the  resultant  force  is  d  g,  and  the  intersection 
of  the  links  D  0  and  G  0  will  give  a  point  in  its  line  of 
action. 

Let  them  meet  at  y.  Through  this  point  draw  the 
perpendicular  x  y,  then  the  e.g.  is  in  this  line,  and  the 
resultant  force  of  the  whole  mass  acts  along  it. 

All  that  is  required  for  present  use  is  the  magnitude 
of  the  resultant  force  and  its  line  of  action.  The  above 
method  will  give  it  whatever  be  the  number  of  segments 
into  which  the  figure  is  divided. 

Should  it  be  required  to  ascertain  where  in  the  line 
X  y  the  e.g.  is  situated,  the  whole  figure  may  be  con- 
sidered as  lying  on  the  side  B  G. 

In  this  case  K  L,  L  M,  and  M  N  would  give  the 
directions  and  positions  of  the  forces  exerted  by  the 
bottom,  middle,  and  top  portions  respectively. 

By  drawing  a  new  force  diagram,  and  proceeding  as 
before,  x'y'  is  obtained,  and  the  e.g.  of  the  whole  figure 
is  at  the  point  where  this  intersects  x  y. 

Examples  to  Chaptepv  V 

1.  A  beam  rests  on  two  supports,  A  and  B,  10  ft. 
apart.  If  a  load  of  15  tons  be  placed  3  ft.  from  B, 
what  are  the  reactions  of  the  supports  ? 

2.  A  girder  weighing  1  ton,  and  15  ft.  long,  carries  a 


104     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC    STATICS 

load  of  1 J  tons  4  ft.  from  one  end,  and  another  of  2  tons 
5  ft.  from  the  other  end. 

Find  the  total  load  on  each  support. 

3.  A  beam  weighing  75  lbs.,  and  9  ft.  long,  is  sup- 
ported on  two  props. 

If  a  weight  of  25  lbs.  be  placed  3'  6''  from  one  end,what 
are  the  thrusts  of  the  props  ? 

4.  A  beam  rests  on  two  walls  12  ft.  apart.  If  it 
weighs  90  lbs.,  where  must  a  weight  of  60  lbs.  be  placed 
so  that  the  one  wall  will  carry  twice  as  much  as  the 
other  ? 

5.  Fig.  1  shows  a  beam  supporting  three  weights. 


cwts 

I 

mil 

\ 

Clfftt 

i 

\^' 

C 

-*«- 

J' 

-»«- 

J'           H 

Ex. 

Ch. 

v.— 

Fig. 

1. 

At  what  point  could  they  be  accumulated  so  as  not 
to  interfere  with  the  reactions  ? 

6.  A  rod  6  ft.  long,  and  weighing  3  lbs.,  acts  as  a  lever, 
the  fulcrum  being  2  ft.  from  one  end. 

If  a  6  lb.  weight  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the  shorter 
section,  what  weight  must  be  placed  at  the  other  end  of 
the  bar  to  balance  it  ? 

7.  A  king-post  truss  carries  a  distributed  load  of 
5  tons. 

Draw  a  line  diagram  of  the  truss,  and  indicate  the 
amount  of  load  at  each  point  of  support.  Span =25  ft,  ; 
pitch=30°. 

8.  Fig.  2  shows  a  girder  loaded  at  two  points. 
Find  the  reactions  of  A  and  B, 


EXAMPLES   TO    CHAPTER    V 


105 


A 

\/ho*.                 V                     V                    \/ 

B 

P 

2  \tGns 

3  tons. 

M 

Ex.  Ch.  v.— Fig.  2. 

9.  Find  the  reactions  due  to  the  three  loads  shown  in 
Fig  3. 


5 

tons. 

If 

tons. 

L 

tons 

A 

\ 

\ 

\ 

/ 

B 

M 

Wa 

Ex.  Ch.  v.— Fig.  3. 


10.  Find  the  total  reaction  of  each  support  due  to  the 
three  loads  shown  in  Fig.  4. 


/J  I  mt% 


Jims 


Ex.  Ch.  v.— Fig.  4. 


Chapter  VI 


BENDING  MOMENTS,  AND  SHEARING  FORCE 

169.  In  Chapter  II  it  was  explained  what  Bending 
Moment  (B.M.)  means,  and  how  to  find  it  arithmetically. 

We  will  now  proceed  to  find  it  graphically.  We 
will  take  the  case  of  a  simple  beam  loaded  at  different 
points,  as  shown  in  Fig.  90. 


A  oci  ^  iC^gi    D 


Draw  the  funicular  polygon,  and  find  the  reactions 
as  shown  in  the  last  chapter. 

First,  let  it  be  required  to  find  the  moment  about 
X.  Draw  the  perpendicular  x  y,  cutting  the  funicular 
polygon  in  m  and  n. 

Now  the  resultant  of  all  the  forces  on  one  side  of 


BENDING   MOMENT  107 

X  is  equal  to  the  resultant  of  all  the  forces  on  the  other 
side  (§  145). 

There  is  only  one  force  on  the  left  of  x,  80  E  A  is 
the  resultant,  and  e  a  on  the  force  diagram  represents 
this. 

Taking  the  triangles  mnp  and  eao,  since  mn  is 
parallel  to  ea,  pm  parallel  to  e  o,  and  p  n  parallel  to 
a  o,  these  two  triangles  are  similar  in  every  respect. 

Draw  the  perpendiculars  p  r  and  o  s  from  p  and  o  to 
m  n  and  e  a  respectively. 

Then  mn    :  pr  :  :  ea  :  o  s 

and  ea  x  pr  =  mn  x  o  s. 

But  e  a  is  the  force  E  A  and  pr  is  its  perpendicular 
distance  from  the  point  x. 

Therefore  ea  x  pr  =  the  moment  of  all  the  forces 

about  X. 
But  ea  X  pr  =z  mn  x  o  s, 
therefore   mn    x   o  s  =  the   moment  of  all  the  forces 

about  X. 

mn  is  the  perpendicular  distance  across  the  funicular 
polygon  directly  beneath  x,  and  o  5  is  the  perpendicu- 
lar distance  of  the  pole  from  the  line  of  loads. 

Next,  let  it  be  required  to  find  the  moment  about  g. 

Draw  the  perpendicular  g  h,  meeting  the  funicular 
polygon  in  i  and  j. 

The  forces  on  the  right  of  this  section  are  CD  and 
D  E,  therefore  the  resultant  is  represented  by  c  e,  and 
it  acts  where  the  links  C  0  and  E  0  meet,  that  is  at  k 
(§  145). 

Because  i  k  is  parallel  to  eo,  jk  parallel  to  c  o,  and 
j  i  parallel  to  c  e,  the  two  triangles  j  i  k  and  ceo  are 
similar. 

Draw  k  I  perpendicular  to  g  h. 


108     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

Then  j  i  :  kl  :  :  c  e  :  o  s, 
and  c  e  x  kl  =  j  i  x  o  s. 

Since  c  e  is  the  resultant  of  the  forces  on  one  side 
of  g,  and  k  I  the  perpendicular  distance  of  its  point  of 
application  from  the  section, 

therefore  c  e  x  A;  Z  =  the  moment  of    the  resultant  of 
C  D  and  D  E  about  the  point  g, 
or,   c  e  X  kl  =:  the   moment   oi    C  D  and   D  E 
about  g  (§  44). 
But  c  e  ^=  ec,    and   e  c  is   the  resultant    of 
E  A,  AB,  and  BG, 
therefore  c  e  x  kl  =  the   moment   of  E  A,   A  B,   and 
B  C  about  g. 
Again,  c  e  x  kl  =  j  i  x  o  s, 
therefore  ji  x  o  s  =  the    moment    of    CD    and    Z>  ^ 
about  g^ 
and    ^*  i  x  o  s  =  the    moment    of    E  A,  A  B   and 
J5  O  about  gr. 
But    j  i    is    the    perpendicular    distance    across    the 
funicular  polygon  directly  beneath   the   point  g,   and 
o  5    is  the  perpendicular  of  the  pole  from  the  line  of 
loads. 

o  5  is  called  the  "  polar  distance." 
It  is  now  evident  that  the  B.M.  at  any  part  of  the 
beam  is  given  by  multiplying  the  perpendicular  across 
the  funicular  polygon  beneath  that  point  by  the  polar 
distance. 

But  for  any  one  funicular  polygon  the  polar  dis  tance 
is  constant,  therefore  the  B.M.  varies  directly  as  the 
perpendiculars  (or  ordinates)  across  the  polygon. 

For  this  reason  the  funicular  polygon  is  called  the 
Bending  Moment  diagram. 

170.  The   ordinates  of  the   B.M.   diagram   must   be 


BENDING    MOMENT  109 

measured  with  the  lineal  scale,  but  the  polar  distance, 
being  on  the  force  diagram,  must  be  measured  with  the 
force  scale. 

171.  Up  to  the  present  the  pole  has  been  taken  at 
any  point,  but  it  will  now  be  seen  that,  if  the  bending 
moment  is  required,  it  is  advisable  to  place  it  so  that 
its  perpendicular  distance  from  the  line  of  loads  will 
represent  a  definite  number  of  lbs.,  cwts.,  or  tons. 

172.  It  will  also  be  noticed  that  it  would  be  much 
more  convenient  if  a  scale  could  be  found  with  which 
the  bending  moment  could  be  measured  directly  off  the 
ordinates,  instead  of  measuring  the  ordinates  with  the 
lineal  scale  and  multiplying  this  by  the  polar  distance. 

Suppose  in  Fig.  89  that  o  s  represents  4  cwts.,  and 
that  the  lineal  scale  is  J''  =  1  ft.,  then  if  an  ordinate 
measures  V  it  represents  4  ft.,  but  this  must  be  multi- 
plied by  4  cwts.,  so  an  ordinate  of  V  represents  a  bend- 
ing moment  of  4  ft.   x    4  cwts,  or  16  ft. -cwts. 

This  gives  a  new  scale  of  V  =  16  ft.-cwts.,  by  which 
the  moment  can  be  measured  directly  off  the  Bending 
Moment  diagram. 

173.  This  new  scale  is  called  the  "  Bending  Moment 
scale,"  and  is  obtained  by  multiplying  the  lineal  scale 
by  the  polar  distance  expressed  in   lbs.,  cwts.,  or  tons. 

In  (§  172)  a  bending  moment  scale  of  T'  =  16  ft.- 
cwts.  was  obtained.  This  is  not  a  convenient  scale 
with  which  to  read  off  the  bending  moment  by  applying 
the  rule  to  the  diagram. 

To  obtain  a  B.M.  scale  such  that  the  bending  moment 
can  be  read  off  directly,  the  polar  distance  must  be 
taken  as  1,  5,  10,  50,  or  100,  etc.  (lbs.,  cwts.,  or  tons). 

Let  the  lineal  scale  in  Fig.  90  be  J''  =  1  ft.,  and  o  s 
(the  polar  distance)  =  5  cwts. 


110     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

Then  the  B.M.  scale  is  Hneal  scale  x  polar  dist  ince, 
that  is  J''  =  1  ft.  X  5  cwts,  —  5  ft.-cwts.,  or  B.M. 
scale  is  Y  =  1^  ft.-cwts. 

Again,  suppose  the  lineal  scale  to  be  j''  =:  10',  and 
the  polar  distance  10  lbs. 

Then  the  B.M.  scale  is  f  =  10  ft.  x  10  lbs., 
or  B.M.  scale  is  |^'  =  100  ft.-lbs.   . 

By  judiciously  selecting  the  polar  distance,  as  shown 
above,  a  decimally  divided  scale  is  obtained,  with 
which  the  readings  can  be  taken  directly  off  the  diagram, 
as  explained  in  Chapter  I. 

174.  Example. — A  beam  is  20  ft.  long  and  loaded  with 
6  cwts.  4  ft.  from  one  end,  and  8  cwts.  5  ft.  from  the 
other. 

Find  the  greatest  B.M.  and  the  B.M.  at  the  centre. 
Adopt  two  scales  (say  J"'  =  1  ft.  and  ^  =  10  cwts.). 
Set  out  the  beam  with  the  positions  of  the  loads  and 
draw  the  line  of  loads  (Fig.  91). 

Place   the  pole   any   convenient   distance   from   this 
(say  15  cwts.)  ;  draw  the  vectors  and  B.M.  diagram. 
Then  the  Bending  Moment  scale 
=  Lineal  scale  x  polar  distance 
=  Y  =  l  ft.  X  15  cwts.  =:  15  ft.-cwts. 

=3V"  =  10  ft.-cwts. 

With  the  Bending  Moment  scale  measure  the  ordinates 
at  the  widest  part  of  the  B.M.  diagram  and  at  the  centre. 

These  represent  a  bending  moment  of  36  ft.-cwts.  and 
32  ft.-cwts.  respectively. 

The  greatest  B.M.  is  at  the  point  where  the  8  cwts.  is 
placed,  and  it  should  be  noticed  that  it  is  always  under- 
neath one  of  the  loads. 

175.  Problem. — A  beam  16  ft.  long  is  supported  at 
both  ends.     A  load  of  12  cwts.  is  placed  3  ft.  from  one 


i 


BENDING   MOMENT 


111 


bcufts. 


Scwts. 


A 

i 

5, 

I 

C 

\          '                1              '             1 

A 

i 

1 

D 

y» 

,      ~\ 

--^ 

■^ 

^^        1 

Lvneal.  mL 


s  b 


I  I  I   I 


Scaks:  Force. 
BM 


w 


IIIIIIIH 


1 


0  10    30     so      70 


mrrTT 


XI 


FiG.  91. 


10  11   n      rt 

riQ  it. 


{Uuft%. 


end,  a  load  of  10  cwts.  is  placed  4  ft.  from  the  other, 
and  a  load  of  15  cwts.  is  placed  at  the  centre. 
Find :   1.  The  reactions  of  the  supports, 

2.  the  greatest  bending  moment, 

3.  the  moment  of  the  12  cwts.  about  the  centre, 

4.  the  moment  of  the  three  loads  about  the  centre. 
Taking  two  scales,  such  as  Y  =  1  ft.  and  |''  =  10  cwts., 

set  out  the  beam  (Fig.  92),  and  draw  the  force  and  B.M. 
diagrams. 

12  cwts        15  cults     lOcu/ts 
A  i     B        i     C    i     D 


Scales:  Force.  Tmiiiiiii 


Fio.  92. 


00  p. 


112     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC    STATICS 

The  B.M.  scale  =  Lineal  scale   x   polar  distance. 

=  f '    =1  ft.    X    30  cwt.  =  30  ft.-cwt. 
=  -^"  =  10  ft.-cwt. 

1.  The  reactions  oi  D  E  and  E  A  are  represented  by 
d  e  and  e  a  on  the  force  diagram  and  are  17-25  cwts.  and 
19-75  cwts.  respectively. 

2.  The  greatest  B.M.  is  at  the  centre,  and  is  repre- 
sented by  I  f,  which  scales  98  ft.-cwts. 

3.  Note  that  the  first  and  last  letters  of  the  12  cwt. 
load  are  A  and  B.  The  moment  of  ^  i5  at  the  centre 
will,  therefore,  be  represented  by  the  length  of  the 
ordinate  from  the  centre  intercepted  between  the  links 
^  0  and  5  0. 

Referring  to  the  diagram,  it  will  be  seen  that  the  link 
A  0  does  not  extend  as  far  as  the  perpendicular.  It 
must  be  produced  until  it  does,  thus  cutting  off  the 
ordinate  /  g,  which  scales  60  ft.-cwts. 

4.  The  three  loads  constitute  the  three  forces  A  B, 
B  C,  and  C  D,  the  first  and  last  letters  of  which  are 
A  and  D.  The  moment  of  these  about  the  centre  will 
be  represented  by  the  portion  of  the  perpendicular  from 
the  centre  intercepted  between  the  links  A  0  and  D  0. 

The  link  D  0  must  be  produced  until  it  meets  the 
perpendicular  at  h. 

h  g  gives  the  required  moment,  which  is  20  ft.-cwts. 

176.  The  Bending  Moment  diagrams  can  be  applied 
to  beams  supported  at  one  end  (cantilevers)  as  well  as 
to  beams  supported  at  both  ends. 

Fig.  93  shows  a  cantilever  loaded  at  the  outer  end. 
It  is  required  to  draw  the  B.M.  diagram. 

Draw  the  load  line  a  b,  and  select  a  pole. 

(In  the  case  of  cantilevers  it  is  more  convenient  to 
place  the  pole  so  that  the   closing   line   of   the    B.M. 


BENDING   MOMENT 


113 


diagram  will  be  horizontal.  To  obtain  this,  the  pole 
is  placed  opposite  the  top  or  bottom  of  the  line  of  loads.) 

Draw  the  vectors  a  o  and  b  o.  From  any  point  on  the 
support  draw  the  link  A  0  parallel  to  ao  until  it  inter- 
cepts the  line  of  action  of  the  load.  From  this  point 
draw  the  link  B  0  parallel  to  bo.  The  triangle  thus 
formed  is  the  B.M.  diagram,  and  from  it  the  moment 
at  any  part  of  the  beam  can  be  obtained  by  dropping 
perpendiculars  as  previously  shown. 

In  the  case  of  a  cantilever  with  the  single  load,  the 
B.M.  can  be  much  more  conveniently  found  by  multi- 
plying the  load  by  its  distance  from  the  point  selected. 


Fig.  93. 


Thus,  if  the  load  be  5  cwts.,  and  the  cantilever  8  ft., 
the  B.M.  at  the  wall  end  is  8  ft.  x  5  cwts.,  or  40  ft. -cwts., 
and  2  ft.  from  the  wall  it  is  6  ft.  x  5  cwts.,  or  30  ft.-cwts. 
177.  Problem. — A  cantilever  8  ft.  long  supports  a 
load  of  3  cwts.  at  its  centre.,  2  cwts.  at  its  outer  end, 
and  1  cwt.  midway  between  these. 
It  is  required  to  find — 

(a)  the  greatest  bending  moment, 

(6)  the  resultant  of  the  3  cwts.  and  1  cwt.,  and 

its  point  of  application, 
(c)  the  resultant  of  the  three  loads  and  its  point  of 
application, 


114     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

and  (d)  what  load  can  be  placed  at  the  end  of  the 
beam  to  produce  the  same  strain  at  the  wall 
end  as  that  caused  by  the  three  loads. 
Having  decided  upon  the  scales,  set  out  the  beam  as 

shown  in  Fig.  94.     Draw  a  line  of  loads  and  select  a 


A  Lb  J.  c  i 


Lineal 

Fore 

BM 


Scales:  Force,    ii   if  t  ^ 


10-   0.      1 


isft.mts. 


I    I    I 


FfG.  94. 


pole.  Join  a,  b,  c,  and  d  to  o,  and  draw  the  links  A  0, 
B  0,  C  0  and  D  0  parallel  to  a  o,  b  o,  c  o  and  d  o  respec- 
tively. The  figure  thus  obtained  is  the  Bending 
Moment  diagram. 

(a)  A  glance  will  show  that  the  greatest  B.M.  is  at  the 

wall  end,  and  this  measured  by  the  B.M.  scale 
gives  34  ft.-cwts. 

(b)  The  two  loads   are  A  B  and  B  G,    therefore  a  c, 

which  is  equal  to  4  cwts.,  is  the  resultant,  and 
this  acts  where  the  links  A  0  and  G  0  meet.  A 
perpendicular  from  this  point  to  the  beam  gives 
the  point  x,  4J  ft.  from  the  wall. 

(c)  The  three  loads  are  A  B,  B  G  and  G  D,  therefore 

the  resultant  is  represented  by  a  d,  which  equals 


BENDING    MOMENT 


115 


6  cwts.,  and  the  intersection  of  the  links  A  O 
and  D  0  gives  a  point  in  its  Hne  of  action.  A 
Hne  through  this  point  parallel  to  a  d  gives  the 
point  y  on  the  beam,  5f  ft.  from  the  wall. 
(d)  With  the  load  to  be  substituted,  the  B.M.,  I  m,  is 
to  remain  the  same.  Since  the  same  pole  can 
be  used,  the  link  D  0  remains.  Join  I  n.  Then 
Imn  is  the  new  B.M.  diagram. 
From  o  draw  a  vector  parallel  tol  n.     Let  this  meet 

the  load  line  at  e. 
e  d  is  the  new  load,  which  is  equal  to  4 J  cwts. 
178.  Bending  Moment  with  Distributed  Loads. — 
We  have  now  to  consider  the  strain  caused  by  an  evenly 
distributed  load. 

We  will  first  draw  a  B.M.  diagram  as  if  the  whole  load 
X  y  were  concentrated  at  the  centre  of  the  beam  (Fig.  95). 
The  triangle  p  qr  is  this  diagram. 


y^ 


Fig.  95. 


Now  divide  the  load  x  y  into  a  number  of  equal  parts, 
and  place  them  at  equal  distances  apart  on  the  beam. 

Draw  the  vectors  and  complete  the  B.M.  diagram. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  B.M.  is  much  less  at  the  centre 
when  the  load  is  so  split  up,  and  that  the  links  appear 
to  form  the  chords  of  a  curved  line.     If  the  load  had 


116     ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OP   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

been  divided  into  a  greater  number  of  equal  parts 
equidistantly  placed,  this  would  have  been  more  ap- 
parent still. 

But  the  limit  to  the  division  of  a  load  is  to  evenly 
distribute  it  along  the  entire  length  of  a  beam,  and  in 
that  case  the  B.M.  at  the  centre  is  one-half  what  it 
would  be  if  the  load  were  concentrated  at  the  centre, 
and  the  links  would  form  one  continuous  curve  of  a 
parabolic  form  with  the  vertex  at  the  centre. 

179.  In  order,  then,  to  draw  the  B.M.  diagram  for 
a  beam  with  a  distributed  load,  we  must  know  how  to 
draw  a  parabola. 

To  show  this  we  will  take  an  example.     Fig.  96  shows 


Fig.  96. 


a  beam  with  an  evenly  distributed  load  which  is  equal  to 
a  6  on  the  force  diagram. 

Draw  the  B.M.  diagram  k  el  as  if  the  whole  load 
were  at  the  centre. 

Bisect  d  e  Sbt  f,  and  through  /  draw  g  f  h  parallel  to 
k  I,  and  complete  the  parallelogram  k  g  hi. 

Divide  k  g  into  any  number  of  equal  parts,  and  join 
each  point  to  /.     Divide  k  d  into  tlie  same  number  of 


BENDING  MOMENT 


117 


equal  parts,  and  from  each  point  thus  obtained,  drop 
perpendiculars. 

By  numbering  the  points  in  both  directions  from  k, 
as  shown,  the  perpendicular  from  1  should  meet  the 
line  1  /,  the  perpendicular  from  2  should  meet  2  /,  and 
so  on.  A  curved  line  through  these  intersections  forms 
the  figure  kdf,  which  is  half  the  parabola,  and  is  half 
the  required  B.M.  diagram. 

The  other  half  can  be  drawn  in  the  same  way,  but, 
since  the  diagram  will  be  symmetrical,  this  is  unneces- 
sary. If  the  B.M.  be  wanted  at  any  point  on  the  second 
half  of  the  beam,  a  point  can  be  taken  similarly  placed  on 
the  first  half  and  the  B.M.  at  that  point  ascertained. 

Of  course,  the  bending  moment  at  any  point  is  ascer- 
tained from  the  diagram  as  previously  shown,  i.e.  by 
finding  the  B.M.  scale  and  measuring  the  ordinate 
beneath  that  point. 

i8o.  A  cantilever  with  a  distributed  load  gives,  like 
the  beam,  a  maximum  B.M.  equal  to  one-half  what  it 
would  be  if  the  load  were  concentrated  at  the  farthest 
point  from  the  support. 

Fig.  97  is  given  as  an  illustration. 


118     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


Set  out  the  cantilever  to  scale,  and  draw  a  h  equal 
to  the  total  load.  Select  a  pole,  draw  the  vectors,  and 
the  bending  moment  diagram  I  mn. 

I  m  gives  the  B.M.  at  the  wall  if  the  total  load  were 
concentrated  at  the  end.  Bisect  this  in  /,  and  complete 
the  parallelogram  m  f  g  n. 

Draw  the  semi-parabola  m  f  n  3bS  explained  in  §  179, 
then  m  f  n  is  the  B.M.  diagram. 

It  should  be  noticed  that  in  whatever  form  a  can- 
tilever is  loaded,  the  B.M.  at  the  unsupported  end  is 
nil,  and  that  it  increases  as  the  wall  is  approached, 
reaching  its  maximum  at  that  end. 

i8i.  Cantilevers  and  beams  supported  at  both  ends 
may  have  concentrated  and  distributed  loads  at  the 
same  time.  If  the  weight  of  the  beams  themselves  be 
considered,  then  there  is  always  a  distributed  load. 

A  B.M.  diagram  of  a  cantilever  under  the  two  systems 
of  loading  is  shown  in  Fig.  98. 

it 


The  figure  I  m  n  p 
concentrated    loads. 


is  the  B.M.  diagram  for  the  two 
and    the    figure    s  pn    the    B.M. 


BENDING   MOMENT 


119 


diagram  for  the  uniformly  distributed  load  which 
is  represented  by  c  c?  on  the  line  of  loads. 

In  order  to  find  the  B.M.  at  any  point,  verticals 
must  be  drawn  across  the  figure  slmn  and  measured 
as  before  on  the  bending  moment  scale. 

182.  Fig.  99  shows  the  B.M.  diagram  for  two  con- 
centrated loads  and  a  uniformly  distributed  load  on  a 
beam  supported  at  both  ends. 


The  B.M.  diagram  for  the  concentrated  loads  is  drawn 
as  already  explained.  This  diagram  being  below  the 
closing  link,  it  will  be  necessary  to  place  the  B.M. 
diagram  for  the  distributed  load  above  it.  On  the  line 
of  loads  set  off  cZ  e  and  d  /,  each  equal  to  one-half  of  the 
distributed  load,  e  /  will  then  be  equal  to  the  whole 
distributed  load. 

From  the  ends  of  the  closing  link  draw  links  parallel 
to  the  vectors  e  o  and  /  o.  The  perpendicular  g  h  would 
give  the  B.M.  at  the  centre  if  the  whole  of  the  distri- 
buted load  were  concentrated  there.     Bisect  gh  in  i, 


120     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


and  with  the  closing  link  as  the  chord  make  a  parabola 
pa,ssing  through  the  point  i.  This  parabola,  together 
with  the  B.M.  diagram  for  the  concentrated  loads,  gives 
the  required  Bending  Moment  diagram. 

183.  Shearing  Force. — It  has  been  shown  that  a 
load  placed  on  a  beam  tends  to  produce  rotation,  which 
tendency  is  called  "  the  bending  moment."  A  load 
placed  on  a  beam,  besides  tending  to  produce  rotation, 
also  tends  to  cause  one  portion  to  slide  vertically  past 
another,  as  shown  in  Fig.  100. 

This  second  effect   of  the 
load  is  like  that  of  the  jaws 
of   a    shearing   machine,    so 
the  tendency  of  the   weight 
to    produce   vertical    move- 
ment    at     any     section     is 
called    the   Shearing    Force 
(S.F.)  at  that  section. 
To  prevent  this  movement,  the  end  B  C  oi  AG  must 
exert  forces  or  stresses  on  the  end  D  E  oi  D  F  sufficient 
to  keep  it  in  position.     The  amount  of  the  stress  is 


F 


B 


D 


F 


Fig.  100. 


clearly  equal  to  the  vertical  force  W. 

Taking 

i: 


Fig.  101,  the 
Shearing  Force  at  c  c  is 
equal  to  W,  but,  proceed- 
ing to  the  section  6  6, 
this  force  is  diminished 
by  the  upward  force  W\ 
so  the  Shearing  Force  at 
&  6  is  W  —W.  Proceeding 
again  to  the  section  a  a 
the  Shearing  Force  is  augmented  by  the  downward 
force   W",  therefore  the  S.F.  at  a  a  is  W -W  +  W\ 


a 


I 


w 

Fig.  101. 


iW 


I 


SHEARING  FORCE  121 

Since,  in  Fig.  101,  there  are  four  parallel  forces  in 
equilibrium,  the  "  reaction  of  the  wall  "  is  equal  to 
W  -  W  +  W\  Commencing  on  the  left,  the  S.F.  at 
a  a  is  equal  to  the  reaction  of  the  wall,  i.e.,  W  — 
W  +  W\ 

To  the  left  of  &  &  the  forces  are  the  reaction  of  the  wall 
and  W"  acting  in  the  opposite  direction,  therefore  the 
S.F.  at  6  6  is  (If  -  IT'  +  W")  -  W"  =  W  -  W\ 

To  the  left  of  c  c  the  forces  are  the  reaction  of  the 
wall,  W",  acting  downwards,  and  W\  acting  upwards, 
therefore  the  Shearing  Force  Q>icc  \^  (W  —  W  +  W") 
-  W  +  W  =  W. 

These  results  correspond  with  those  obtained  for  the 
various  sections  when  considering  the  forces  on  the 
right  of  those  sections. 

Hence  the  S.F.  at  any  section  is  obtained  by  finding 
the  algebraical -sum  of  all  the  forces  on  either  side  of 
the  section. 

184.  By  drawing  ordinates  from  each  point  on  the 
force  diagram  across  the  space  represented  on  the  beam 
by  the  same  letter  as  that  which  distinguishes 
that  point  on  the  force  diagram,  a  Shearing  Force 
diagram  can  be  obtained  which  will  graphically  repre- 
sent the  S.F,  at  every  point  of  the  beam. 

An  examination  of  Figs.  102,  103  and  104  will  make 
this  clear. 

185.  Ordinates  across  the  Shearing  Force  diagram 
perpendicularly  under  any  point  of  the  beam,  and 
measured  on  the  force  scale,  will  give  the  Shearing  Force 
at  that  point  of  the  beam. 

For  the  S.F.  at  any  part  of  the  space  A  (Fig.  104)  is 
given  hy  ah  —  h  c  +  cd  or  da;  the  S.F.  at  any  part 
of  the  space  B  is  given  hy  d  a  —  ah  orhd;  and  the  S.F. 


122      ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


i 


A  iB   ia  A  IBl 


I 


a 


c 
b 

d 


AiSTCi 


D 


Fig.   102. 


Fig.   103. 


Fig.   104. 


at  any  part  of  the  space  C  is  given  hy  da  —  ah  +  he 
or  cd. 

1 86.  If  a  cantilever  carries  a  uniformly  distributed 
load,  the  S.F.  at  the  unsupported  end  is  nil,  but  it 
gradually  increases  as  the  wall  is  approached  until  at 
that  end  it  is  equal  to  the  total  load. 

The  S.F.  diagram  is  therefore  drawn  as  shown  in 
Fig.  105. 


P 


iQQQQQQO 


a 


b 


B 


A 


B 


■pr 


Fig.   105. 


Fig.   106. 


187.  Fig.  106  shows  a  cantilever  with  a  load  dis- 
tributed over  a  portion  of  its  length.  It  will  be  noticed 
that  the  S.F.  for  the  whole  space  A  is  equal  to  the 
total  load,  but  that  under  the  load  it  gradually  dimi- 
nishes towards  the  outer  end. 

188.  If  necessary  the  Shearing  Force  due  to  concen- 


SHEARING    FORCE 


123 


i  B  i 


trated  and  uniformly  distributed  loads  on  a  cantilever 
can  easily  be  shown  on  one  diagram. 

Fig.  107  shows  such  a  Shearing  Force  diagram  where 
c  d  represents  the  uniformly  distributed  load. 

189.  The  Shearing  Force 
diagrams  for  beams  sup- 
ported at  both  ends  are 
obtained  in  the  same  way  as 
those  for  cantilevers,  but  as 
the  S.F.  is  the  algebraical 
sum  of  all  the  forces  on  either 
side  of  the  section  taken,  and 
the  reactions  of  the  supports 
are  forces  acting  on  the 
beam,  it  will  be  necessary  to 
find  them.  This  has  been  done,  as  will  be  seen  on 
referring  to  Figs.  108  and  109,  by  means  of  the  funi- 
cular polygon. 

If  the  polar  distance  be  known,  then  these  funicular 
polygons    also    serve    as    Bending    Moment    diagrams 

(§  171). 

The  Shearing  Force  diagrams  are  obtained,  as  pre- 
viously explained,  from  the  force  diagram.  An  ex- 
amination of  the  two  shearing  force  diagrams  should 
make  this  quite  clear. 

Figs.  108  and  109  show  how  to  draw  the  B.M.  and 
S.F.  diagrams  for  an  irregularly  loaded  beam  in  one 
figure. 

190.  If  a  beam  carries  a  uniformly  distributed  load, 
the  S.F.  at  each  end  is  equal  to  the  reactions  of  the 
supports,  each  of  which  is  equal  to  one-half  of  the  load. 
From  each  end  it  gradually  diminishes  as  the  centre  of 
the  beam  is  approached. 


124     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


Fio.   108. 


A         i    B    i 


Fig.   109. 


Figs.  110  and  111  show  alternative  ways  of  drawing 
the  Shearing  Force  diagram  under  these  circumstances. 

191.  In  order  to  show  on  one  diagram  the  S.F.  due  to 
tlie  two  systems  of  loading  of  a  beam  supported  at  both 


EXAMPLES   TO   CHAPTER   VI 


125 


^  cxxxxxn,  ^ 


P  M 


^j;;|jiiii^^^[[| 


h 


Fig.  110. 


Fig.  111. 


ends,  it  is    necessary  to  modify  the  S.F.    diagram  of 
Fig.  109. 

This  modification,  together  with  the  diagram  showing 
the  Shearing  Force  of  the  uniformly  distributed  load, 
is  shown  in  Fig.  112. 


;  e  I 


Fig.   112. 


Examples  to  Chapter  VI 

1.  What  does  "  the  bending  moment  "  mean  ? 

2.  How  is  the  B.M.  scale  found  ? 


126     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

In  a  certain  exercise  the  lineal  scale  was  Jj^and  the 
"  polar  distance  "  5  cwts. 
Give  the  B.M.  scale. 

3.  A  beam,  15  ft.  long  and  supported  at  both  ends, 
carries  a  load  of  2*5  tons  6  ft.  from  one  end. 

Find  the  greatest  B.M.  and  the  B.M.  at  the  centre. 

4.  Draw  the  B.M.  diagram  for  a  beam  20  ft.  long  with 
a  distributed  load  (including  its  own  weight)   of  15  tons. 

5.  A  cantilever,  8  ft.  long,  supports  a  load  of  5  cwts. 
at  its  outer  extremity. 

Find,  geometrically,  the  moment  about  the  centre. 

6.  What  is  meant  by  "  the  Shearing  Force  ?  " 

7.  A  cantilever  10  ft.  long  has  a  distributed  load  of 
3  cwts.  per  ft.  on  the  outer  half. 

Draw  the  Shearing  Force  diagram,  and  give  the  S.F. 
at  the  wall  end. 

^  8.  A  beam,  which  is  supported  at  both  ends,  and 
is  20  ft.  long,  has  a  load  of  6  tons  placed  6  ft.  from 
one  end. 

Find  the  "  bending  moment "  and  the  "  shearing 
stress  "  at  the  centre  of  the  beam. 

9.  A  beam,  fixed  at  one  end  and  IT  6''  long,  supports 
three  loads — 5  cwts.  3'  10"  from  the  wall,  6  cwts. 
7'  8"'  from  the  wall,  and  2  cwts.  at  the  unsupported 
end. 

Find  the  B.M.  and  S.F.  at  the  centre. 
V   10.  A  girder  20  ft.  long  supports  a  load  of  5  cwts. 
6  ft.  from  one  end  and  a  load  of  7  cwts.  4  ft.  from  the 
other. 

What  load  could  be  placed  at  the  centre  of  a  similar 
beam,  so  that  the  maximum  bending  moment  may  be 
the  same  as  that  at  the  centre  of  the  given  beam  ? 


Chapter  VII 
STRESS  OR  RECIPROCAL  DIAGRAMS 

192.  It  has  been  shown  in  Chapter  IV  that  forces  can 
be  apphed  along  certain  directions  to  resist  the  action 
of  some  force  or  forces  and  so  maintain  equihbrium. 

The  usual  method  of  introducing  these  new  forces 
is  by  means  of  bars  of  iron  or  wood.  The  members  thus 
introduced  have  to  exert  a  certain  amount  of  force, 
depending  on  the  magnitude  of  the  force  or  forces  they 
have  to  resist,  and  on  the  angles  at  which  they  are 
applied  (§  97).  The  resistance  thus  brought  forth  from 
the  bar  is  called  "  the  stress,"  and  by  means  of  the  tri- 
angle or  polygon  of  forces  its  magnitude  and  direction 
can  be  obtained. 

193.  It  was  also  shown  in  §  92  that  a  bar  exerting  a 
force  at  one  end  exerts  an  equal  and  opposite  force  at 
the  other.  Hence  these  new  members  are  only  intro- 
duced to  transmit  the  force  from  one  point  to  a  more 
convenient  one,  either  to  the  point  of  support,  or  to  a 
point  where  other  members  can  be  introduced  to  further 
transmit  it. 

As  an  example  of  the  former  see  Figs.  58  and  59,  where, 
to  support  the  weight,  two  members  are  introduced. 
These  are  secured  to  the  wall,  to  which  the  force  exerted 
by  the  weight  is  conveyed. 

To  illustrate  the  latter  the  cantilever  shown  in  Fig. 
113  will  be  examined. 

1«7 


128     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

If  we  only  consider  the  force  A  B  and  the  bar-s  B  G 
and  C  A,wQ>  have  a  repetition  of  Fig.  59,  and  the  magni- 
tude and  direction  of  the  stresses  set  up  in  J^  O  and  G  A 
are  given  by  the  lines  6  c  and  c  a  in  the  triangle  ah  c. 
The  bar  5  C  is  exerting  a  force  towards  the  load,  there- 
fore it  exerts  an  equal  force  towards  the  joint  at  the 

Z  tons.         ^ 


Fig.   113. 


opposite  end,  and  is  in  compression  (§  92).  G  A  acts 
from  the  load,  consequently  it  acts  from  the  opposite 
joint,  and  is  in  tension. 

We  will  now  examine  the  joint  at  the  lower  end  of 
B  G.  We  have  there  three  bars,  B  D,  D  G,  and  G  B, 
but  we  have  just  determined  the  magnitude  and  direction 
of  the  force  exerted  hj  G  B.  It  is  represented  by  c  6. 
By  reproducing  c  h,  and  drawing  lines  parallel  to  B  D 


I 


RECIPROCAL  DIAGRAMS  129 

and  D  G  the  triangle  ch  d  \^  obtained,  and  the  hnes  h  d 
and  d  c  give  the  magnitude  and  direction  of  the  stresses 
set  up  in  ^  D  and  D  C.  It  will  be  seen  that  5  i)  is  a 
compression  bar  and  D  C  &  tension  bar. 

Proceeding  to  the  opposite  end  of  D  C,  we  have  four 
bars,  AC,  C D,  DE  Sind  E A.  Two  of  these,  A  C  and 
G  D,  have  already  been  determined,  and,  since  they  are 
tension  bars,  they  act  away  from  the  joint.  Draw  a  c 
and  c  d  to  represent  these  in  magnitude  and  direction, 
remembering  that  the  order  in  which  the  letters  are 
placed  must  indicate  the  direction  of  the  force  repre- 
sented by  the  line. 

From  a  draw  a  line  parallel  to  E  A,  and  from  d  a  line 
parallel  to  D  E.  Let  these  intersect  at  e.  Then  d  e  and 
e  a  will  represent  the  stresses  in  the  bars  D  E  and  E  A . 

194.  The  student  will  no  doubt  have  noticed  that 
instead  of  reproducing  c  b,  the  triangle  cb  d  could  have 
been  made  on  the  c  6  of  the  first  triangle,  and  that  the 
figure  thus  obtained  could  have  been  utilized  to  form 
the  last  figure.  The  figure  ab  d  e  c  is  formed  by  com- 
bining the  three  figures  in  this  way,  and,  since  the  stress 
in  each  member  of  the  cantilever  can  be  obtained  from 
it,  it  is  called  the  "  stress  diagram." 

The  combination  of  the  various  force  diagrams  in  this 
manner  saves  time  and  prevents  mistakes  arising  through 
inaccurately  transferring  the  measurements. 

1 95.  The  magnitude  of  the  stress  in  each  bar  is  obtained 
by  measuring  with  the  force  scale. 

196.  The  stress  diagram,  being  a  force  diagram,  must 
close. 

197.  The  loads  and  the  reactions  of  the  supports  are 
called  the  exterior  or  external  forces,  and  the  stresses  are 
called  the  interior  or  internal  forces. 


130     ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

198.  The  method  of  procedure  in  drawing  a  stress 
diagram  is  almost  the  same  in  every  case,  and,  if  the 
student  thoroughly  understands  one,  he  will  have  less 
difficulty  in  applying  his  knowledge  to  new  pro- 
blems. For  this  reason  it  is  intended  to  more  fully  ex- 
plain how  the  forces  act  in  the  cantilever  shown  in 
Fig.  113.  The  frame  and  stress  diagrams  of  that  figure 
are  reproduced  in  Fig.  114,  with  the  joints  of  the  frame 
diagram  numbered  for  reference. 

199.  It  was  explained  in  the  chapter  on  Bow's  nota- 
tion, that,  if  the  known  force  (or  forces)  acting  at  a 
point  be  named  in  clockwise  order,  and  if  the  first  letter 
of  such  name  be  placed  first  in  the  line  of  action  of  the 
line  representing  such  force  (or  forces),  then  the  letters 
naming  the  other  forces  will,  when  taken  in  the  same 
direction  round  the  figure,  give  the  direction  of  the  un- 
known forces. 

It  was  also  explained  that  compression  bars  exert  an 
outward  force  (i.e.  towards  the  joint)  at  each  end,  and 
the  tension  bars  an  inward  force  (i.e.  from  the  joint) 
at  each  end. 

If,  then,  it  is  necessary  to  find  the  kind  of  stress  in  a 
bar,  all  that  is  required  is  to  select  a  joint  at  one  of  the 
ends  of  a  bar,  name  it  in  clockwise  order,  and  follow  the 
direction  of  the  corresponding  letters  on  the  stress 
diagram. 

As  an  example,  we  will  take  the  vertical  bar  (Fig. 
114). 

If  we  select  the  joint  marked  2,  this  bar  is  DC  D 
is  the  first  letter,  so  d  on  the  line  dcoi  the  stress  diagram 
is  the  first  point  in  its  course  of  action,  hence  the  force 
acts  upwards  from  the  joint  2.  Proceeding  to  the  joint 
3,  the  bar,  when  named  in  clockwise  order,  becomes 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


131 


CD.  C  is  now  tlie  first  letter,  and,  turning  to  the  stress 
diagram,  we  find  that  from  c  to  t?  is  a  downward  direc- 
tion. C  D,  therefore,  acts  from  the  joint  3.  Hence  the 
bar  C  D  or  D  (7  is  in  tension.  Since  both  ends  of  a  bar 
exert  the  same  kind  of  force  (i.e.  inwards  or  outwards) 
only  one  end  need  be  examined.  It  should  be  noticed 
that,  when  considering  one  end  of  the  bar,  the  stress 
was  given  by  c  d,  and,  when  considering  the  other  end, 
it  was  represented  hy  dc. 


3  tons. 


Fig.   114. 


I 


What  has  been  said  about  the  bar  C  D  and  its  re- 
ciprocal line  c  d,  applies  to  all  the  bars  and  their  recipro- 
cals. 

200.  Taking  the  joint  marked  1,  the  forces  are  ^  B, 
B  G  and  C  A,  and  these  are  represented  in  magnitude 
and  direction  hj  ah,h  c,  and  c  a,  that  is,  to  maintain  the 
load  A  B,  the  bar  G  A  must  exert  a  pull  equal  to 
3  tons,  and  the  bar  B  G  must  push  with  a  force  equal 
to  4-2  tons.  In  order  that  G  A  should  exert  a  pull,  the 
other  end  must  be  attached  to  something  to  which  it 
transmits  the  force  as  shown  by  the  string  (§  93).  It  is 
secured  to  the  joint  3,  and  here  it  exerts  a  pull  equal  to 
3  tons,  as  shown  by  a  c  on  the  stress  diagram. 


132     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 

B  C  pushes  against  the  load,  and,  by  domg  so,  presses 
towards  the  joint  2  with  a  force,  as  shown  by  c  &,  equal 
to  4-2  tons.  To  resist  this  thrust  the  two  bars  B  D  and 
D  G  are  introduced.  The  bar  B  D,  as  shown  by  h  d, 
pushes  towards  the  joint  with  a  force  equal  to  3  tons, 
and  by  doing  this  exerts  an  equal  pressure  against  the 
wall  at  the  joint  4.  The  bar  D  C  has  to  exert  an  upward 
pull  at  the  joint  2,  which,  as  we  have  already  seen, 
means  a  downward  pull  at  the  joint  3.  This  pull  is 
given  by  c  (^  as  being  equal  to  3  tons.  This  down- 
ward pull  of  C  Z>  is  resisted  by  the  action  of  the  bars 
D  E  and  E  A.  D  E  pushes  towards  the  joint  3  with  a 
force  equal  to  4*2  tons,  and  consequently  exerts  an 
equal  pressure  against  the  wall  at  the  joint  4.  The  pull 
in  ^  ^  caused  by  the  action  oi  C  D  and  D  E  is  shown 
by  e  c  to  be  equal  to  3  tons,  but  in  addition  to  this,  it 
has  to  resist  the  pull  of  A  C,  therefore  the  total 
tension  in  .27  ^  is  equal  to  6  tons,  as  shown  by  e  a  on 
the  stress  diagram,  and  this  acts  away  from  the  joint  5. 

201.  Having  ascertained  the  kind  and  amount  of 
stress  of  each  bar,  we  will  now  consider  the  effect  on  the 
wall. 

We  have  seen  that  at  the  joint  5  there  is  an  outward 
pull  of  6  tons.  At  the  joint  4:,  B  D  gives  a  direct  thrust 
of  3  tons,  and  E  D  sm  oblique  thrust  of  4-2  tons. 
E  D  must  be  resolved  into  its  vertical  and  horizontal 
components,  each  of  which  is  equal  to  3  tons,  as 
shown  by  e  a;  and  x  d.  The  total  horizontal  thrust  at 
the  joint  4  is  therefore  equal  to  6  tons. 

Hence  the  two  horizontal  reactions  of  the  wall  are 
each  equal  to  6  tons,  but  opposite  in  direction,  and  the 
vertical  reaction  of  the  wall  is  equal  to  3  tons. 

202.  The  same  principle  underlies  the  construction 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS  133 

of  all  framed  structures,  viz.  the  transference  of  a  force 
from  one  point  to  another  where  it  can  be  more  con- 
veniently dealt  with,  and,  as  the  known  forces  can  be 
utilized  to  discover  the  unknown  ones,  the  stress  in 
every  part  of  a  framed  structure  can  be  ascertained  by 
means  of  the  stress  diagram. 

203.  The  stress  diagram  is  a  valuable  check  on  results 
arrived  at  arithmetically,  and  if  a  structure  be  badly 
designed,  the  stress  diagram  at  once  makes  it  apparent 
by  exposing  the  redundant  members,  and  refusing  to 
close  if  necessary  members  are  omitted. 

204.  Having  determined  the  kind  and  amount  of 
stress  which  the  proposed  load  will  produce  in  each 
member  of  a  framed  structure,  the  sectional  area  of  the 
members  can  be  determined. 

205.  It  is  now  intended  to  find  the  stresses  produced 
by  given  loads  in  the  members  of  the  more  common 
structures.  After  what  has  been  said  about  the  action 
of  forces,  and  the  explanation  of  the  stress  diagram  in 
this  chapter,  the  student  will  have  no  difficulty  in  fol- 
lowing them. 

The  method  of  procedure  is  as  follows  : — 

(1)  Set  out  the  structure  to  scale. 

(2)  Adopt  a  force  scale  and  draw  the  line  of  loads. 

(3)  Determine  the  position  of  the  loads,  and  indicate 
them  on  the  structure.  The  loads  are  to  come  on  the 
joints  of  the  structure.  If  the  true  position  of  a  load 
be  at  some  intermediate  point  of  a  bar,  it  must  be  so 
divided  that  each  joint  at  the  end  of  the  bar  gets  its 
proper  proportion  of  the  load. 

(4)  Determine  the  reactions  of  the  supports.  If  the 
structure  be  symmetrical  and  symmetrically  loaded, 
each  reaction  wiU  be  equal  to  half  the  load  ;  if  not,  the 


134     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


reactions  may  be  determined  by  means  of  the  funicular 
polygon. 

(5)  Place  letters  (or  numbers)  between  all  the  exterior 
forces,  and  then  in  all  the  spaces  of  the  frame. 

(6)  An  exterior  force  (usually  one  of  the  reactions, 
though  not  always),  is  now  chosen  where  not  more  than 
two  members  act,  and  resolved  along  their  directions. 

(7)  At  the  next  joint  one  of  these  is  combined  with  the 
exterior  force  (if  there  be  one),  and  resolved  along  the 
direction  of  the  other  bars.  This  process  is  continued 
until  all  the  bars  are  resolved. 

2o6.  Fig.  115  shows  a  span  roof  with  a  load  concen- 
trated at  the  ridge. 

i 

B 


Fig.  115. 
At  the  ridge  there  are  three  forces,  the  load  A  B  and 
the  two  rafters  resisting  this.  Since  there  are  three 
forces  in  equilibrium,  and  A  B  is  known,  the  triangle  of 
forces  can  be  applied  to  determine  the  others,  ah  c  is 
this  triangle,  and,  as  the  names  of  the  rafters  in  clock- 
wise order  are  B  C  and  C  A,b  c  and  c  a  give  the  directions 


RECIPROCAL  DIAGRAMS  135 

as  well  as  the  magnitudes  of  the  forces  exerted  by  them. 
These  act  towards  the  joint,  and  are  therefore  in  com- 
pression. Taking  the  rafter  C  ^ ,  since  it  exerts  a  pres- 
sure represented  by  c  a  at  the  ridge,  a  c  will  represent  the 
pressure  it  exerts  at  the  foot.  This  force  is  resisted  by 
the  vertical  and  horizontal  reactions  of  the  wall  C  D,  and 
by  resolving  the  force  a  c  along  those  directions  the  tri- 
angle a  cd  is  obtained,  c  d  and  d  a  represent  those 
reactions,  therefore  d  c  shows  the  proportion  of  the  load 
A  B  borne  by  the  wall  C  D,  and  a  d  represents  the  force 
which  tends  to  overturn  the  wall. 

The  rafter  B  C  presses  with  a  force  represented  by 
h  c  towards  the  ridge,  and  consequently  with  a  force  c  h 
towards  the  foot.  This,  being  resolved  in  vertical 
and  horizontal  directions,  gives  c  e  the  vertical  thrust 
and  e  h  the  horizontal  thrust  of  the  rafter. 

It  should  be  noticed  that  the  two  vertical  reactions 
of  the  walls  are  together  equal  to  the  total  load.  This 
is  shown  by  c  c  and  cd  (or  ed)  being  equal  io  ah. 

The  two  horizontal  reactions  are  also  equal,  as  shown 
hy  da  and  h  e. 

207.  If  one  of  the  rafters  be  more  inclined  than  the 
other,  as  in  Fig.  116,  we  find  that  the  stress  in  this  is 
greater  than  in  the  less  inclined  one,  and  that  this  in 
turn  produces  a  greater  vertical  reaction. 

This  is  what  we  should  expect,  because  the  line  of 
action  of  the  load  ^  ^  is  nearer  to  E  C  than  to  G  D. 

Again,  the  sum  of  the  two  vertical  reactions  is  equal 
to  the  load,  and  the  horizontal  reactions  are  equal  to 
each  other. 

208.  With  six  spring  balances,  a  few  pieces  of  string, 
and  a  weight,  fitted  up  as  shown  in  Fig.  117,  the  student 
may  perform  a  very  interesting  experiment  for  himself. 


136     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


The  only  difference  between  this  and  the  two  previous 
examples  is  that  the  directions  of  the  forces  are  reversed, 
but  this  will  not  affect  their  magnitudes. 


=>o 


Fig.  117. 


RECIPROCAL  DIAGRAMS  137 

The  weight  can  be  sUpped  to  different  positions,  and 
the  effect  on  each  balance  noted. 
Briefly,  they  are  as  follows  : — 

(a)  The  more  inclined  any  section  of  the  string  becomes, 
the  greater  is  the  stress  produced. 

(b)  The  nearer  the  weight  is  to  one  side,  the  greater  is 
the  proportion  of  the  weight  supported  by  the  vertical 
balance  on  that  side. 

(c)  The  two  vertical  balances  together  always  register 
a  force  equal  to  that  of  the  weight. 

{d)  And  the  forces  registered  by  the  horizontal  bal- 
ances are  always  equal  to  one  another  and  opposite  in 
direction. 

As  an  exercise  he  should  select  one  of  the  positions, 
graphically  determine  the  forces,  and  compare  the 
results  with  those  shown  on  the  balances. 

209.  In  the  two  previous  exercises  we  have  assumed 
that  the  total  load  is  on  the  ridge.  Each  rafter  is  in 
reality  a  beam  with  a  distributed  load,  and  half  this  load 
is  supported  at  each  end.  Thus  the  load  on  the  ridge 
is  only  one  half  the  total  load,  the  other  half  being  sup- 
ported directly  by  the  walls.  Fig.  118  shows  the  load 
apportioned  in  this  manner.  A  new  member  is  also 
introduced. 

Draw  ab,  be  and  c  d  to  represent  the  three  loads. 
a  d  now  represents  the  total  load,  and  d  a  the  total 
reactions.  The  frame  and  the  loading  being  symmetrical 
the  two  reactions  will  be  equal.  Bisect  d  a.  The  re- 
actions oi  D  E  and  E  A  are  represented  hy  d  e  and  e  a 
respectively.  Since  e  a  represents  the  total  reaction  of 
the  wall  E  A,  and  the  load  represented  by  a  6  is  sup- 
ported directly  by  the  wall,  the  remainder  e  6  is  the 
reaction  caused  by  the  load  on  the  frame. 


138     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

By  resolving  eh  in  directions  parallel  to  B  F  and  F  E 
the  triangle  eb  fis  obtained.  The  sides  of  this  represent 
the  forces  in  magnitude  and  direction  when  taken  in 
order  round  the  triangle.  If  we  follow  them  we  find 
that  j5  i^  is  in  compression  and  F  E  in  tension. 

We  can  proceed  in  a  similar  manner  with  the  other 
reaction,  and  obtain  the  triangle  c  e  /,  which  determines 
the  forces  exerted  hjEF  and  F  G.     It  should  be  noticed 

(PC 


Fig.   118. 


that  the  new  member  is  introduced  to  resist  the  outward 
thrust  of  the  rafter,  which  it  does  by  exerting  an  inward 
force  at  each  end. 

(We  may,  if  we  like,  treat  the  foot  of  the  rafter  as  if  the 
four  forces,  E  A,  A  B,  B  F  and  F  E  were  acting.  E  A 
and  A  G  are  known,  and  by  resolving  them  along  the 
directions  of  the  others,  we  get  a  polygon  of  forces 
whose  sides  are    ea,  ab,  b  f  and  /  e.     But  a  h  Hes  on  a 


RECIPROCAL  DIAGRAMS 


139 


portion  of  e  a,  and  the  polygon  appears  as  shown  by 
eah  f  e.) 

210.  We  will  now  take  a  roof,  as  shown  in  Fig.  119,  and 


8^/ 

\C 

l^   ' 

\l 

1                                                                f 

^       -   X  -      -^ 

-    y    ^ 

^-^          ~~ 

-^     .     

^ 

^ 

Fig.  119. 


suppose  the  load  on  each  rafter  to  be  6  cwts.  Appor- 
tioning the  load,  we  get  6  cwts.  on  the  ridge  and  3  cwts, 
on  each  wall. 

Since  the  line  of  action  of  5  C  is  nearer  the  one  wall 
than  the  other,  they  will  not  support  equal  shares,  so 
we  must  fall  back  on  one  of  the  methods  of  determining 
the  reactions. 

The  usual  way  is  by  means  of  the  funicular  polygon. 
Draw  the  line  of  loads.  Since  it  is  the  proportion  of 
B  C  which  each  wall  supports  that  has  to  be  determined, 
join  b  and  c  to  a  pole.  Draw  the  funicular  polygon  and 
o  e  parallel  to  the  closing  link,  d  e  and  e  a  now  represent 
the  total  reactions  oiD  E  and  E  A  respectively,  (c  e  and 
e  h  could  have  been  found  by  means  of  similar  triangles 
(§  51),  or,  if  X  and  y  be  known,  they  could  have  been 
ascertained  by  taking  the  moments  about  either  sup- 
port (§  50).) 


140     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


Having  ascertained  the  position  of  e,  the  stress  diagram 
can  be  drawn  as  in  the  previous  exercise. 

211.  Taking  Fig.  118,  and  adding  a  vertical  member 
(a  king-rod)  we  obtain  Fig.  120. 

a 


Fig.  120. 


(i 


The  stress  diagram  shows  /  and  g  at  the  same  point. 
The  distance  between  them  being  nil,  shows  that  the 
load  produces  no  stress  m.  F  G. 

This  is  what  we  should  expect,  since  at  the  bottom  of 
F  G  there  are  three  bars,  two  of  which  are  parallel,  meet- 
ing at  a  point  (§  110). 

212.  If  we  camber  the  tie-rod,  we  obtain  Fig.  121. 

a 


Fig.   121. 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


141 


Resolve  e  6,  the  resultant  oi  E  A  and  A  B,  in  directions 
parallel  to  B  F  and  F  E,  thus  obtaining  h  f  and  /  c.  h  f 
represents  the  force  exerted  by  B  F  Sit  the  foot,  therefore 
/  b  represents  the  force  it  exerts  at  the  ridge.  At  this 
latter  point  there  are  four  forces,  but  i^  J5  and  B  C  are 
known,  and  are  represented  by  /  6  and  h  c,  therefore  by 
drawing  lines  from  c  and  /  parallel  to  C  G  and  G  F,  eg 
and  g  f  are  obtained,  and  these  give  the  stresses  in 
those  members.  By  combining  the  force  g  c  with  c  e, 
the  resultant  oi  C  D  and  D  E,  and  resolving  parallel  to 
E  G,  eg  ia  obtained,  and  this  gives  the  tension  in  E  G. 

It  will  be  seen  that  by  cambering  the  tie-rod,  a  tensile 
stress  is  produced  in  the  king-rod. 

213.  Fig.  122  shows  another  kind  of  roof  truss.  It  is 
formed  by  the  addition  of  two  members  to  Fig.  120. 


/)i^Z<^ 


Fig.  122. 

Resolve  g  6  as  before,  and  so  obtain  h  h  and  h  g.  Combine 
h  h  with  the  load  h  c,  and  resolve  parallel  to  C  I  and  /  H, 
thus  obtaining  c  i  and  i  h.  By  combining  i  c  and  c  d,  and 
resolving  parallel  to  D  J  and  J  I,  dj  and  j  i  are  deter- 
mined, and  by  combining  j  d  with  d  e  and  drawing  lines 
parallel  to  E  K  and  K  J,  e  k  and  k  j  are  obtained.  Since 
k  and  h  are  at  the  same  point,  g  kis  equal  to  h  g,  therefore 
the  stresses  in  all  the  members  are  found. 


142     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


The  lines  h  i  and  k  j  coincide  with  a  portion  of  the 
lines  h  e  and  k  b  respectively,  but  this  should  present 
no  difficulty,  if  it  be  remembered  that  each  is  a  side 
of  a  polygon  of  forces. 

214.  By  cambering  the  tie-rod  of  the  last  figure  we 
obtain  Fig.  123. 


Fig.   123. 


h  and  k  do  not  now  come  together,  neither  do  h  i  and 
k  j  coincide  with  h  e  and  A;  6  as  in  the  last  exercise. 
215.  In  Fig.  124  we  have  a  different  arrangement. 


i 


i 


CX^D 


B^l/J 


i 


F 


k                        . 

b 

^^^f^ 

c 

^^^^^ 

t                  ^ 

* 

e 
f 

Fig.   124. 


By  means  of  the  reactions,  B  H  and  H  G  can  be  deter- 
mined. The  stress  in  HB  and  the  load  CD  can  be 
utilized  to  obtain  the  stresses  in  O  /  and  /  H.  If  we 
proceed  to  the  ridge,  we  find  that  of  the  five  forces  acting 


RECIPROCAL  DIAGRAMS 


143 


Fig.   127. 


144    ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

there,  we  only  know  /  G  and  G  D,  so  we  cannot  i)roceed 
at  that  point.  If  we  go  to  the  joint  at  the  bottom  of 
H  I,  by  means  of  the  stresses  oi  G  H  and  H  I,  we  can 
find  those  oi  I  J  and  J  G.  Now  we  know  three  of  the 
five  forces  acting  at  the  ridge,  so  that  we  can  determine 
the  others.     This  problem  presents  no  further  difficulty. 

216.  Figs.  125,  126,  and  127  show  trusses  which  are 
loaded  at  a  greater  number  of  points. 

The  construction  of  the  stress  diagrams  for  these 
should  present  no  difficulty,  if  it  be  remembered  that  the 
line  representing  the  stress  in  one  bar  may  lie  partly  or 
wholly  on  the  line  representing  the  stress  in  another  bar. 

The  bars  J  K  and  R  8  (Fig.  127)  may  at  first  prove  a 
little  disconcerting,  but  an  examination  of  them  will 
show  that  at  the  bottom  joint  of  each  there  are  three 
bars,  two  of  which  are  parallel,  therefore  the  stress  in 
J  K  and  RS  due  to  the  loading  is  nil  (§  110).  They 
are  introduced  to  prevent  the  tie-rod  sagging. 

217.  Fig.  128  shows  a  braced  cantilever  with  a  con- 
centrated load  at  its  outer  end. 


a     f 


Fig.   128. 


The  stresses  in  B  C  and  C  A  are  obtained  by  resolving 
A  B  along  those  directions  and  so  obtaining  the  triangle 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


145 


ah  c.  ca  represents  the  force  exerted  by  ^  O  at  its 
lower  end,  therefore  a  c  is  that  which  it  exerts  at  the 
upper  end.  By  resolving  this  parallel  to  G  D  and  D  A, 
we  get  c  d  and  d  a,  which  give  the  stresses  in  those  mem- 
bers. By  combining  the  stresses  of  D  C  and  C  B  and 
resolving  parallel  to  B  E  and  E  D,  a  polygon  whose  sides 
are  dc,cb,b  e,  and  e  d,  is  obtained,  b  e  and  e  d  give  the 
stresses  inB  E and E D respectively.  Similarly  by  com- 
bining the  stresses  oi  A  D  and  D  E,  those  oi  E  F  and 
F  A  are  obtained. 

The  reactions  of  the  wall  are  determined  as  shown  in 
§201. 

2x8.  Fig.  129  shows  a  braced  cantilever  with  a  dis- 
tributed load. 


Fig.  129. 


The  first  thing  we  have  to  consider  is  how  to  divide 
the  load.  It  will  be  seen  that  it  is  supported  by  two 
bars  of  equal  length.  Each  supports  one  half  of  the 
total  load,  therefore  one  quarter  of  the  total  load  is 
supported  at  each  end  of  the  two  bars. 

Thus  A  B  equals  one  quarter  of  the  load,  B  C  equals 
one  half  of  the  load,  and  C  I)  equals  one  quarter  of  the 
load. 


146     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


By  means  of  the  load  G  D  the  stresses  oi  D  E  and  E  G 
are  obtained.  The  stress  oi  E  D  ia  utilized  to  find  those 
ol  D  F  and  F  E.  By  combining  the  load  B  G  with  the 
stresses  oi  G  E  and  E  F,  the  stresses  of  F  G  and  G  B  are 
determined. 

219.  Fig.  130  shows  another  form  of  braced  cantilever 
with  a  distributed  load. 

In  allocating  the  load  to  its  various  points  of  support, 
we  find  that  the  bar  B  G  is  one  half  the  length  of  the 
bar  G  E,  and  consequently  receives  only  one  third  of 
the  load.  Half  of  this  third,  or  one  sixth  of  the  total 
load,  is  supported  at  each  end  of  the  bar   B  G.      Half 


^ 

}b\ 

c 

1 

i 

Yr^ 

E 

v 

/o 

i 

Fig.   130. 
of  the  remainder,  or  one  third  of  the  total  load,  is  sup- 
ported at  each  end  of  G  E.     The  total  load,  then,  is  so 
divided  that  A  B  equals  one  sixth  of  the  load,  B  G  equals 
6  +  J  or  i  of  the  load,  and  G  D  equals  J  of  the  load. 

The  stress  diagram  is  drawn  in  exactly  the  same 
manner  as  that  of  the  last  exercise. 

220.  When  dealing  with  the  roof  trusses,  we  obtained 
the  magnitude  of  the  stress  in  each  bar  by  measuring 
with  the  force  scale  its  corresponding  line  on  the  stress 
diagram. 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


147 


Looking  at  the  stress  diagrams  of  Figs.  128  and  129, 
we  see  that  the  former  is  made  up  of  equilateral  triangles 
and  half  such  triangles,  and  that  the  latter  is  made  up  of 
right-angled  isosceles  triangles.  As  the  sides  of  these 
triangles  always  bear  a  certain  relationship  to  each  other, 
if  we  know  the  length  of  one  side  we  can  easily  obtain  that 
of  tlie  others. 

We  will  first  examine  the  stress  diagram  of  Fig.  128. 
If  we  know  the  lengths  of  the  sides  of  the  triangle  ah  c, 
we  know  the  lengths  of  all  the  other  lines  in  the  diagram. 
The  relationship  between  the  sides  of  this  triangle  is  as 
follows  : — 

h  c='&ll  xab  or  ^  a  c, 
ab=-S66xa  c, 
and  a  c= 1-155  xab  or  2  h  c. 

Proceeding  to  the  stress  diagram  of  Fig.  129,  and  taking 
the  triangle  c  d  e,  we  have — 

c  d=c  e='707  xd  e, 
and  d  6=1-414  xc  d. 

To  show  how  this  knowledge  is  applied,  a  load  of  3 
tons  is  taken  in  Fig.  128.  a  b  now  represents  3  tons, 
therefore  a  0=1-155  x  a  6=3-46  tons,  and  6c=l-73 
tons. 

ad,  c  d,  d  e  and  e  f  are  each  =a  c=3-46  tons. 

a /=2  a  c=6'93  tons. 

6e=6cxcc=(l-73  +  3-46)  tons  =5-19  tons. 

In  this  manner  the  stress  in  the  bars  of  the  foregoing 
cantilevers  and  the  following  girders  can  be  obtained 
with  mathematical  accuracy  without  making  use  of  the 
force  scale.  The  magnitude  and  kind  of  stress  in  each 
bar  should  be  indicated  on  the  frame  diagram  as  shown 
in  Fig.  128. 

221.  The  remaining  figures  show  a  few  short  Warren 


148     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


and  N  girders  under  different  kinds  of  loads,  with  their 
respective  stress  diagrams. 

The  difficulty  which  will  be  found  in  drawing  the 
stress  diagrams  for  these  is  caused  by  some  of  the 
bars  not  being  called  upon  to  resist  the  action  of  the 
load,  i.e.  the  stress  in  them  due  to  the  load  =  0. 

Having  ascertained  these  and  determined  the  ex- 
terior forces,  the  drawing  of  the  stress  diagrams  be- 
comes comparatively  easy. 

Fig.  131.  The  load  A  B  being  midway  between  the 
supports,  the  two  reactions  B  C  and  C  A  are  equal. 


Fig.   131 


At  each  end  of  the  top  flange  there  are  only  two 
bars,  and  these  are  at  right  angles  to  each  other.  It 
is  evident  two  forces  acting  at  right  angles  to  each 
other  cannot  maintain  equilibrium,  therefore,  since 
these  corners  are  in  equilibrium,  we  know  that  these 
bars  exert  no  force. 

To  indicate  that  the  stress  in  A  D  =^  0,  d  must  be 
placed  at  the  same  point  as  a  on  the  stress  diagram. 
Similarly,  j  must  be  placed  at  the  same  point  as  h. 

The  stress  diagram  can  now  be  drawn  in  the  ordinary 
way. 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


149 


222.  Fig.  132  is  the  same  girder  as  the  last,  with  a 
distributed  load  on  the  top  flange. 


Fig.  132. 

The  chief  difficulty  in  this  is  in  apportioning  the  load 
to  the  several  points  of  support. 

The  bars  B  H  and  E  N  being  half  as  long  at  the  bars 
C  J  and  D  L,  only  receive  half  as  much  of  the  load,  so 
J  of  the  load  comes  on  each  of  the  two  former,  and  J  on 
each  of  the  two  latter.  Half  of  each  of  these  loads  is 
supported  at  each  end  of  the  bars,  therefore  A  B  =  3^, 
BC  =  -^  +  iorlCD  =  i  +  iori,  DE  =  i  +  '-^ 
or  i,  and  E  F  =  ^. 

At  either  end  of  the  top  flange  there  are  apparently 
three  forces,  two  of  which  are  parallel,  hence  we  know 
that  the  stresses  in  ^  ^  and  N  F  are  equal  to  ^  ^  and 
E  F  respectively,  and  that  the  stresses  in  B  H  and 
EN  =  0  {^  110). 

To  indicate  this  on  the  stress  diagram,  place  h  at  the 
same  point  as  h,  and  n  at  the  same  point  as  e. 

Of  course,  the  bars  B  H  and  E  N  are  necessary  to 
support  the  distributed  load.  They  are  subject  to  a 
cross  strain  which  an  ordinary  stress  diagram  is  unable 
to  take  account  of. 


150     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

223.  Fig.  133  shows  a  distributed  load  on  the  bottom 
flange  of  a  girder. 


a 


F 

'A 

1 

A 

K 

/\m 

/" 

V 

J 

V 

L   \ 

D      E] 


Fig.  133. 


Here  the  load  is  distributed  over  three  beams  of 
equal  length.  Each  receives  J  the  load,  and  transmits 
^  of  the  total  load  to  each  end.  The  two  middle 
joints,  therefore,  receive  twice  as  much  as  the  outer 
ones. 

Another  difficulty  presents  itself — the  two  outer 
loads  are  in  line  with  the  reactions.  How  can  these 
be  indicated  on  the  frame  diagram  ?  The  plan  usually 
adopted  is  to  open  out  the  line  as  shown,  and  place  a 
letter  in  the  space.  The  two  outer  lines  must  repre- 
sent the  reactions. 

The  point  /  coincides  with  the  point  c.  At  the  ends 
of  the  top  flange  there  is  a  repetition  of  what  was 
found  in  Fig.  131,  therefore  g  and  m  must  be  placed  at 
the  point  /. 

It  will  be  seen  that  the  letters  i,  j,  and  k  are  at  the 
same  point.  This  indicates  that  the  stress  in  both  I  J 
md  J  K  =  0. 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


151 


224.  Fig.  134  :  The  load  is  shown  in  the  middle  of 
a  bar.  To  draw  the  stress  diagram  this  load  must  be 
divided  between  the  two  joints  at  the  end  of  the  bar. 

K 


At  each  end  of  the  bottom  flange  we  have  the  re- 
action and  two  bars,  but  in  each  case  two  of  these  are 
parallel.  We  therefore  know  that  the  stresses  in  D  C 
and  G  J  =  0,  and  those  oi  A  D  and  J  B  =  the  re- 
actions (§  110). 

This  is  shown  on  the  stress  diagram  by  placing  d 
and  j  at  the  point  c. 

The  load  does  not  affect  F  G  and  G  H. 

225.  Fig.  135  illustrates  an  N  girder  with  a  distributed 
load  on  the  top  flange. 

a 


i     B     I     C    i     D    .. 


Fig.  135. 


152     ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


An  examination  of  the  bars  H  G  and  0  G  will  show 
that  the  stress  in  each  of  them  =  0. 

By  placing  h  and  o  at  the  point  g,  we  have  h  a  and  /  o 
equal  to  the  reactions,  and  these  represent  the  stresses 
oi  H  A  and  F  0. 

226.  In  Fig.  136  we  have,  as  in  Figs.  131  and  133, 
at  each  top  corner,  two  theoretically  useless  bars.     To 


FiCx.   136. 


indicate  their  values  on  the  stress  diagram  d  must  be 
placed  at  the  point  a,  and  k  at  the  point  h. 

G  H  is  another  bar  which  exerts  no  force,  as  can 
easily  be  seen  by  examining  the  bottom  joint.  Its 
work  is  to  prevent  sagging  in  G  C  and  H  G. 

227.  In  Fig.  137  the  reactions  are  not  equal.     They 

r 


I  ^  6%W6't 


k- 


Fig.   137, 


qa 

1 

X 

\, 

\    k 

f 

\ 

kr\iK 

— -^ 

/ 

y\/ 

>^ 

/ 

/" 

^ 

/. 

[n 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


153 


have  been  determined  by  means  of  the  funicular  poly- 
gon, and,  of  course,  if  the  polar  distance  be  known, 
the  bending  moment  at  any  point  can  be  obtained. 

The  stress  in  the  bars  G  A,  S  E  and  L  M  =  0. 

The  two  former  make  the  girder  more  rigid,  and 
L  M  strengthens  the  top  flange  by  resisting  any  bending 
that  is  likely  to  occur  in  F  L  and  F  M  through  being  in 
compression. 

228.  In  Fig.  138  we  have  a  lattice  girder  supporting 
a  number  of  loads.  In  this  a  new  difficulty  presents 
itself,  because  at  no  point  are  there  less  than  three 
unknown  forces.  In  order  to  overcome  this  difficulty, 
we  may  consider  the  girder  as  being  made  up  of  the  two 
girders  shown  in  Fig.  138.  The  loads  retain  the  same 
positions  as  on  the  original  girder. 


1     2     S     U     i 

i  1  i  i  i 

EXXZ 

T                T 

S      I 


I 


(a)     ^^     ib)      ^ 


Fig.   138. 


Fig.   139. 


I 


On  examining  Fig  139  (a)  it  will  readily  be  seen  that 
the  compression  of  each  of  the  vertical  bars  is  equal  to 
the  reaction  of  the  wall  that  supports  it.  These  re- 
actions are  due  to  the  three  loads  1,  3  and  5,  and  can 
easily  be  determined  whatever  the  loads  may  be. 
Turning  to  Fig.  139  (6)  we  see  that  the  two  loads  2 
and  4  do  not  in  any  way  affect  the  vertical  bars  referred 
to.  Therefore,  to  ascertain  the  stresses  of  the  two 
verticals  or  pillars,  it  is  only  necessary  to  find  the 
reactions  due  to  the  loads  1,  3  and  5. 


154     ELEMENTARY  PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 


Having  found  the  force  exerted  by  each  pillar,  we 
have  only  two  unknown  forces  at  the  points  of  support 
of  the  girder,  and  can  proceed  with  the  solution. 

229.  Fig.  140  shows  the  stress  diagram  for  a  lattice 
girder  supporting  a  uniformly  distributed  load. 

From  the  preceding  paragraph  it  will  be  seen  that, 
since  the  load  is  uniformly  distributed,  the  stresses  of 
B  H  and  T  G  are  equal  to  one  another,  each  being 
equal  to  one  quarter  of  the  load.  These  are  shown  by 
b  h  and  t  g  on  the  stress  diagram. 

230.  By  adding  vertical  bars  to  Fig.  140  we  obtain 
Fig.  141.     This  is  termed  a  lattice  girder  with  verticals. 


B 


I  c 

> ' 

D 

i 

£ 

i 

F    i 

^ 

t 

N 

t 

Q 

t 

G  not 


A 


Fig.   140. 


We  may  imagine  this  girder  as  being  a  combination 
of  the  two  single  girders  {a)  and  (b)  (Fig.  142). 

The  load  on  the  original  girder  has  now  to  be  divided 
between  (a)  and  (b)  (Fig.  142).  There  is  on  each  of 
these  a  point  of  support  corresponding  to  every  point 
of  support  on  the  combined  girder,  therefore  half  of 
each  load  on  the  original  girder  must  be  placed  on  the 
corresponding  points  of  the  single  girders. 

This  is  plainly  shown  in  Figs.  141  and  142. 


RECIPROCAL  DIAGRAMS 


155 


Having  divided  the  combined  girder  into  two  single 
ones  and  apportioned  the  loads  as  described,  the  stresses 
in  the  bars  of  the  former  may  be  obtained  by  finding 
those  in  the  bars  of  the  single  ones  and  combining 
them. 

In  considering  Fig.  141  as  being  made  up  of  {a)  and 
(b)  Fig.  142,  it  should  be  noted  that  the  two  booms 
and  all  the  verticals  are  duplicated.  Where  members 
are  duplicated,  the  stresses  must  be  added  or  sub- 
tracted according  as  they  are  alike  or  unlike.  When 
added,  the  sum  will  represent  a  stress  of  the  same  kind 
as  those  added,  and  when  subtracted,   the  difference 

6        20     36      JO      10    2i     10      Hi     IS       6    2i     W      Hi     15       6 


.    ^ 

i   i   i  J 

X 

XXX 

I, 

(a) 


I     (i)      1 


Fig.  141. 


Fig.  142. 


will  represent  a  stress  of  the  same  kind  as  that  of  the 
greater. 

In  order  to  more  clearly  explain  the  method  of  pro- 
cedure, the  stress  diagrams  of  (a)  and  {b)  (Fig.  142)  are 
drawn,  and  the  values  indicated  on  the  girders  (Figs. 
143  and  144). 

These  results  must  now  be  combined  and  figured  on 
the  original  girder,  as  already  explained  (see  Fig.  145). 
Thus,  the  stress  of  the  vertical  B  H  (Fig.  143)  is  +  2-5 
and  that  oi  B I  (Fig.  144),  which  coincides  with  it 
when  superposed,  is  +  22-5.  Being  stresses  of  the  same 
kind,  they  must  be  added.  The  sum  is  +  25,  which 
gives  the  total  stress  oi  B I  (Fig.   145).     Taking  the 


156     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC    STATICS 


vertical  /  J  (Fig.  143),  the  stress  is  —  10,  while  that  of 
the  corresponding  vertical  H  K  (Fig.  143)  is  +  20. 
These,  being  unlike,  must  be  subtracted  and  the  differ- 
ence  given   the   sign   of   the   greater.     Therefore,    the 

E       F 


22-i 

Cv 
■f   , 

/ 

» 

,    / 

Fig.   143. 


fi 


i  ^  i  ^  1  M  M 


Fig.  144. 
stress  oiKL  (Fig.  145)  is  + 10.      Again,  K  A  (Fig.  143) 
coincides  with  K  A  (Fig.   144).     The  stresses  of  these 


RECIPROCAL   DIAGRAMS 


157 


Fig.  145. 
are  —  30  and  —  20  respectively,  therefore  the  stress 
oi  A  N  (Fig.  145)  is  —  50.  Proceeding  in  this  manner, 
the  stresses  of  all  the  members  can  be  obtained.  None 
of  the  diagonals  are  duplicated,  therefore  the  stresses 
of  these  remain  as  found  in  Figs.  143  and  144. 

231.  Fig.  146  shows  the  same  girder  as  that  given  in 

i  C   i  D  U    i   F  A  '  ^ 


B 


'iTi 

Mi 

^A 

Fig.  146. 


158     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES    OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

the  last  paragraph,  but  in  this  case  all  tlie  stresses  are 
obtained  by  means  of  one  diagram.  The  loads  are 
equal  to  those  of  the  last  exercise. 

The  first  difficulty  met  with  is  that  at  the  points  of 
support  there  are  four  forces,  only  one  of  which  is 
known.  In  order  to  find  the  stresses  oi  B  I  and  W  G 
we  must  suppose  the  girder  and  loads  divided  as  shown 
in  Fig.  144,  and  find  the  reactions  of  the  supports. 
The  stresses  in  B  I  and  W  G  due  to  this  half  of  the  load 
are  respectively  equal  to  these  reactions,  but  to  find 
the  total  compression  in  them,  we  must  add  to  each 
the  other  liaK  of  the  load  which  comes  directly  upon  it. 
The  compressive  stress  oi  B  I  due  to  the  half  of  the  total 
load  is  22-5,  and  half  the  load  which  comes  directly 
upon  it  is  2-5,  therefore  the  total  stress  in  5  /  is  +  25. 
Similarly,  W  G  equals  +  32-5. 

The  verticals  K  L,  OP,  and  S  T  will  next  prove 
troublesome,  but  the  rule  is  to  assume  that  the  stress 
in  each  of  these  is  equal  to  one  half  of  the  load  bearing 
directly  upon  it,  which  agrees  with  the  results  obtained 
in  the  last  exercise. 

The  exercise  presents  no  further  difficulty. 

If  the  student  remembers  how  to  find  the  stresses 
of  the  outside  verticals,  and  the  rule  relating  to  the 
inner  ones,  he  should  be  able  to  find  the  stresses  in  a 
lattice  girder  with  verticals  under  any  system  of 
loading. 

232.  In  actual  practice  the  framed  structures  usually 
consist  of  a  much  greater  number  of  parts,  so  that  the 
alphabet  is  insufficient  to  name  them  all.  The  prin- 
ciple of  Bow's  Notation  is  retained,  but  numerals  are 
used  instead  of  letters.  They  have  not  the  advantage 
of  capitals  and  small  letters  respectively  for  the  frame 


EXAMPLES    TO    CHAPTER    VII 


159 


and  force  diagrams,  but  there  is  no  difficulty  in  using 
them  when  once  the  principle  is  fully  understood. 

233.  In  conclusion,  it  must  not  be  supposed  that 
complex  structures  can  now  be  readily  analyzed. 
There  are  some  which  may  take  years  of  study  to  eluci- 
date, and  others  in  which  the  result  depends  upon  the 
nature  of  the  workmanship,  which  cannot  be  foreseen. 
Students  who  have  carefully  worked  through  the 
preceding  pages  should  be  able  to  prepare  stress  dia- 
grams for  all  ordinary  cases,  and,  if  they  are  ambitious, 
may  try  their  hands  at  a  collar-beam  truss  where  the 
walls  are  not  rigid,  a  hammer-beam  truss,  an  arched 
roof  truss,  etc. 

Examples  to  CiiArTER  VII 
1.    Fig.  1  shows  a  couple  close  roof  witli  a  rise  one 
quarter  the  span,  carrying  a  distributed  load  of  16  cwts. 


Ex.  Ch.  VII.— Fig.   1. 
What  are  the  stresses  produced  in  each  member  ? 

2.  The  roof  truss  given  in  Fig.   122  supports  a  dis- 
tributed load  of  5  tons. 

Draw  the  truss  and  figure  the  stresses  on  it. 

3.  Fig.  2  shows  a 
roof  truss  carrying  a 
load  of  4  tons.      Pitch 

Give  the  stresses  of 
all  the  members.  1       Ex.  Ch.  VII.— Fig 


160     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OF   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

4.  Taking  the  load  on  the  Queen-post  truss  shown 
in  Fig.  126  as  5  tons,  determine  the  various  stresses. 

5.  Find  the  amount  and  kind  of  stress  produced  in 
each  member  shown  in  Fig.  128,  with  a  load  of  2-5  tons 
at  its  extremity. 

6.  Find  the  stresses  in  each  member,  and  the  re- 
actions of  the  wall,  due  to  the  load  given  in  Fig.  3. 


Ex.  Ch.  VII.— Fig.  3. 

7.  Fig.  4  is  an  elevation  of  a  trussed  girder  with  a 
concentrated  load. 


Ex.  Ch.  VII.— Fig.  4. 


Draw  to  twice  the  scale,  showing  the  members  in 
compression  by  double  lines,  and  those  in  tension  by 
single  lines,  omitting  any  bars  not  affected  by  the  load. 

8.  Determine  graphically  to  a  scale  of  f'  to  a  ton 
the  reactions  at  the  points  of  support,  and  the  stresses 
set  up  in  the  different  members  of  the  loaded  girder 
shown  in  Fig.  5, 


EXAMPLES   TO   CHAPTER  VH 


161 


'    $  tor?^       ^  tons  ' 

Ex.  Ch.  VII.— Fig.  5. 

9.  A  girder  21  ft.  long  and  2  ft.  deep  is  trussed  as 
shown  in  Fig.  6. 

E 
B 


Ex.  Ch.  VII.— Fig.   6. 


Determine  tlie  stresses  when  it  carries  a  distributed 
load  of  1  cwt.  per  foot. 

10.  Draw  the  stress  diagram  of  Fig.  7  ;  mark  on  the 


Ex.  Oh.  VII.— Fig.   7 


truss  the  amounts  of  the  stresses  in  cwts.,  distinguishing 
between  compression  and  tension  bars. 
What  is  the  bending  moment  at  a:  z/  ? 


ANSWERS   TO   EXAMPLES 

Examples  to  Chapter  1  (pp.  20,  21) 

1.  (a)  9-4  units;  {h)  6-26  yards;  (c)  3-13  tons;  {d) 
5371  lbs. 

2.  {a)  50-91  ft.  ;  (b)  12-99  inches  ;  (c)  22-79  ft ;  {d) 
Tiebeam,  25'.0  ;  Principal,  14-43  ft.  ;  King-post,  7-21  ft.  ; 
Struts,  7-21  ft. 

3.  1-11  inches. 

4.  4-05  units. 

5.  1-809  units. 

6.  4-53  units. 

Examples  to  Chapter  II  (pp.  42,   43) 

1.  273  lbs. 

2.  A  vertical  line  2-3  inches  long, 

3.  {a)  35-5  lbs.  ;  (6)  10-5  lbs. 

4.  {a)  total  load  =  8-75  cwts.  ;  (b)  8-75  cwts,  ;  (c) 
vertically  upwards. 

5.  Horizontal. 

6.  See  pars.  40-44. 

7.  (a)  10  ft.  cwts.  ;  (b)  5  ft.  cwts.  ;  (c)  nil. 

8.  SJ  tons,  at  3-75  ft.  from  one  end. 

9.  10|  cwfcs. 

10.  (a)  503  lbs.  and  700  lbs.  ;  {b)  575  lbs.  and  775  lbs. 

Examples  to  Chapter   III  (pp.  55-57) 

1.  See  par.  78. 

2.  A  vertical  line  2-25  inches  long. 

3.  Between  the  loads  and  2-85  ft.  from  the  smaller. 


Answers  to  examples  163 

4.  1,485  lbs.  ;  the  e.g.  is  -93  ft.  from  the  vertical  face. 

5.  See  par.  77. 

6.  400  lbs.  and  600  lbs. 

7.  (!)  OX;  (2)  XB;  (3)  BF;  (4)  F A  ;  (5)  A  0. 
6.  A  vertical  line  2''  long. 

9.  3  cwt.  acting  vertically  downwards. 

10.  (a)  P  =  35  lbs  ;  (b)  21  lbs.  vertically  downwards. 

Examples  to  Chapter  IV   (pp.  82,  83) 

1.  The  resultant  oi  A  B  and  A  D  ;  equilibrant. 

2.  See  par.  31. 

3.  7  lbs. 

4.  Tension  in  longer  cord,  10-8  lbs.  ;  in  shorter  cord, 
14-4  lbs. 

5.  The  direction  of  the  reaction  of  the  ground  is 
found  by  joining  the  foot  of  the  ladder  to  the  point  of 
intersection  of  the  vertical  through  the  e.g.  of  the  ladder 
and  the  direction  of  the  reaction  of  the  wall ;  magnitude 
of  force  =  156  lbs. 

6.  Vertical  reaction  =  100  lbs.  ;  horizontal  = 
17320  lbs. 

7.  Horizontal  reaction  =  80-7  lbs.  ;  total  reaction  of 
top  hinge  =  262-7  lbs. 

8.  {a)  -  34-64  lbs.  and  +  69-28  lbs. ;  (6)  both 
34-64  lbs. 

9.  1-28  ft.  from  inner  face  of  wall. 

10.  AB  =  1-25  ;  BC  =z  -75,  both  acting  towards 
the  point. 

Examples  to  Chapter  V  (pp.  103-105) 

1.  Reaction  of  ^  =  4-5  tons  ;  of  J5  =  10-5  tons. 

2.  2-23   tons  and  2*26  tons. 

3.  47-2  and  52-7. 


164     ELEMENTARY   PRINCIPLES   OP   GRAPHIC   STATICS 

4.  1  ft.  from  the  end. 

5.  6-13  ft.  from  that  ead  near  which  the  force  of 
4  cwts.  acts. 

6.  2-25  lbs.  • 

8.  ^  =  3-625  tons  ;  B  =  1-375  tons. 

9.  ^  =  3-92  tons  ;  B  =  4-58  tons. 
10.  14-25  tons  and  11-75  tons. 

Examples  to  Chapter  VI  (pp.   125,  126).         '^ 

1.  See  par.  42. 

2.  By  multiplying  the  lineal  scale  by  the  polar  dis- 
tance;   V=  40  ft.-cwts.  or  1"=  10  ft.-cwts. 

3.  9  ft.-cwts.  ;  7-5  ft.-cwts. 

5.  20  ft.-cwts. 

6.  See  par.  183. 

7.  S.F.  =  15  cwts. 

8.  B.M.  =  18  ft.-tons  ;  S.F.  =  1-8  tons. 

9.  B.M.  =  23  ft.-cwts,  ;  S.F.  =  8  cwts. 
10.  2-9  cwts. 

Examples  to  Chapter  VII  (pp.  159-161) 

1.  B  F  a>nd  G  F  =  8-96  cwts.  ;  E  F  =  8-01  cwts. 

2.  BHsindE  K  =  75 cwts. ;  0  / and D  J  =  50 cwts. ; 
IJ,  H  I  siiid  J  K  =  25  cwts.  ;  G  H  and  G  K  =  64-95 
cwts. 

3.  BH  and  EK  =  90-44  cwts.  ;  C I  and  D  J  = 
60  cwts.  ;  /  /  =  40  cwts.  ;  H  I  and  K  J  =  26-39  cwts.  ; 
GH  and  6^  Z  =  79-79  cwts. 

4.  BlandF  M  =  80  cwts.  ;  C  J  and  ^  L  =  60  cwts.  ; 
KHandKD  =  51-96  cwts.  ;  J  /  and  it/  L  =  20  cwts. ; 
J  K  and  KL  =  10  cwts.  ;  H  I  and  H  M  =  69-28  cwts. 

5.  BG  =+  1-44  ;  A  G,  A  D,  D  E  =  -  2-88  ;  D  G 
and    EF=+  2-88:    A  F  =  -  5-76  :    B E  =  +  4:32 


ANSWERS  165 

tons.  The  horizontal  reaction  =  5-76  tons ;  vertical 
reaction  =2-5  tons. 

Q.BE,  BD,  DG=+M2  tons;  E  D  =  -  4:62 
tons  ;  AE  =  -  2-31  tons  ;  AG  =  -  6-93  tons.  The 
horizontal  reactions  =  6-93  tons  ;  vertical  reaction  = 
4  tons. 

8.  A  J  and  I  L  =  0  ;  AM  =  +  3-625  ;  B  M  z=  + 
209  ;  DM  =  +  3-97  ;  F  M  =  +  2-38  ;  ^  Jf  =  +  -79  ; 
1  M  =  +  1375  ;  CK  =  -  303  ;  E  L  =  -  SIS  ;  G  L, 
DE,  F  G'a.nd  HI  =  -  1-59  ;  E  F  smd  G  H  =  +  1-59  ; 
AB  =  -  418  ;  BG  =  +  1-87  ;  G  D  =  -  1-87  tons. 

9.0/,  Z)iH^,  EG=+2i'5;  A I  and  ^  6^  =  - 
25-4  ;  AH  =  -  24-5  ;  I  H  s^nd  H  G  =  +  70  cwts. 

10.  ^  J,  i?  7  =  0  ;  ^  L  =  -  1045  ;GN  =  -  1760  ; 
Z)P=- 214-5;  ES=  +  197-3;  #t/  =  - 148-6;  (?  If 
=  -82-7;  /J=  +  104-375;  /  iT  =  +  104-5  ;  /  ilf 
=  +  1760  ,  10=  +  214-5  ;  /  0  =  +  221-0 ;  I  R=  + 
221-0;  /  I^  zz:  +  197-3  ;  /  F  =  +  148-6  ;  IX=  + 
82-7;  7  7=  +82-625;  J  iT  =  -  148-0  ;  L  if  =  - 
101-0  ;  N0=  -  55-0  ;Pg=- 9-5  ;i2/8'=-  33-75  ; 
TU  =  -  68-7  ;  F  If  =  -  93-0 ;  Z  7  =  -  117-0 ;  iT  L 
=  +  71-4  •  MN  =  +  38-4  ;OP=+6-4;(gi2=:0; 
/S  7^  =  +  24-0  ;  C7  F  =  +  49-0  \  W  X=  +  65-63  cwts. 
B.M.  at  X  7  =  779-75  ft.-cwts. 


Butler  &  Tanner,  The  Selwood  Printing  Works,  Frome,  and  Londoa 


i 


j[  List  of  Standard  Books 


RELATING   TO 


BUILDING    ARCHI- 
TECTURE,   SANITATION 
^    DECORATION 


PUBLISHED  AND  SOLD  BY 


B.   T.    BATSFORD, 

94,    HIGH     HOLBORN,    LONDON, 


I 


A  List  of  Standard   Books 

PUBLISHED     BY 

B.  T.  BATSFORD,  94,  high  holborn,  London. 

HOW  TO  ESTIMATE:  being  the  Analysis  of  Builders' 

Prices.     A  complete  Guide  to  the  Practice  of  Estimating, 

and  a  Reference  Book  of  Building  Prices.     By  John  T.  Rea, 

F.S.I.,  Surveyor.     With  typical  examples  in  each  trade,  and 

a  large  amount  of  useful  information  for  the  guidance  of 

Estimators,  including  thousands  of  prices.     Second  Edition, 

revised  and  enlarged.     Large  8vo,  cloth,  7s.  6c/.  net. 

This  work  is  the  outcome  of  many  years'  experience  in   the  personal 

supervision  of  large  contracts.     It  is  applicable  for  pricing  in  any  part  of 

the  country,  and  is  adaptable  to  every  class  of  building  and  circumstance. 

"  The  book  is  excellent  in  plan,  thorough  in  execution,  clear  in  exposition,  and  will 
be  a  boon  alike  to  the  raw  student  and  to  the  experienced  estimator.  For  the  former  it 
will  be  an  invaluable  instructor;  for  the  latter  a  trustworthy  remembrancer  and  an 
indispensable  work  of  reference."— T/ie  Building  World. 

BUILDING  SPECIFICATIONS,  for  the  use  of  Archi- 
tects, Surveyors,  Builders,  &,c.  Comprising  the  Com- 
plete Specification  of  a  Large  House,  also  numerous  clauses 
relating  to  special  Classes  of  Buildings,  as  Warehouses,  Shop- 
Fronts,  Public  Baths,  Schools,  Churches,  Public  Houses,  &c., 
and  Practical  Notes  on  all  Trades  and  Sections.  By  John 
Leaning,  F.S.I.  650  pages,  with  150  Illustrations.  Large 
8vo,  cloth,  18s.  net. 

"  Cannot  but  prove  to  be  of  the  greatest  assistance  to  the  specification  writer,  whether 
architect  or  quantity  surveyor,  and  we  congratulate  the  author  on  the  admirable  manner 
in  which  he  has  dealt  with  fhesuhiect.'"— The  Builder^ s  Journal. 

BUILDING  MATERIALS:  their  Nature,  Properties, 
and  Manufacture.  With  chapters  on  Geology,  Chemistry, 
and  Physics.  By  G.  A.  T.  Middleton,  A.R.I.B.A.,  Author 
of  "  Stresses  and  Thrusts,"  &c.  With  200  Illustrations  and 
12  full-page  Photographic  Plates.    Large  8vo,  cloth,  10s.  net. 

"  The  author  has  collected  his  materials  with  rare  diligence,  and  has  handled  them 
with  workmanlike  skill  and  judgment;  and  it  would  be  by  no  means  surprising  to  find 
Middleton  on  Materials '  becoming  as  popular  and  as  authoritative  as  '  Leaning  on 
Quantities.'  "—The  Building  World. 

THE      CONDUCT    OF     BUILDING     WORK     AND 

the  Duties  of  a  Clerk  of  Works.  A  Handy  Guide 
TO  THE  Superintendence  of  Building  Operations.  By 
J.  Leaning,  Author  of  "  Quantity  Surveying,"  <fec.  Second 
Edition,  revised.     Small  8vo,  cloth,  2s.  M.  net. 

''This  most  admirable  little  volume  should  be  read  by  all  those  who  have  charge  of 
buildmg  operations    ....     It  deals  in  a  concise  form  with  many  of  the  important 
pomts  arismg  during  the  erection  of  a  building.  "—  The  British  Architect. 
B.  6.  07. 


Seventh  Edition,  Thououghly  Revised  and  greatly  Enlarged. 
BUILDING      CONSTRUCTION      AND      DRAWING. 

A  Text-Book  on  the  Principles  and  Details  of  Modern  Con- 
struction, for  the  use  of  Students  and  Practical  Men.  By 
Charles  F.  Mitchell,  Lecturer  on  Building  Construction 
at  the  Polytechnic  Institute,  London,  assisted  by  George  A. 
Mitchell.  Part  1. — First  Stage,  or  Elementary  Course. 
470  pp.  of  Text,  with  nearly  1,100  Illustrations,  fully 
dimensioned.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  3s. 

"An  excellent  and  trustworthy  little  treatise,  prepared   and  illustrated 

IK   A   VERY   THOROUGH   AND   PRACTICAL   SPIRIT."— TAe  Builder. 

"  It  seems  to  have  most  of  the  advantages  of  "Vols.  1  and  ti  of  Rivington's  '  Building 
Construction,'  with  the  additional  ones  of  cheapness  and  conciseness,  and  appears  to  be 
thoroughly  practical."— J/r.  J.  T.  Hurst,  Author  of  the  ^'■Surveyor's  Handbook." 

"A  model  of  clearness  and  compression,  well  written  and  admirably  illiistrated, 
and  ought  to  be  in  the  hands  of  every  student  of  building  construction." — I%e  Builder. 

Fifth  Edition,  Thoroughly  Revised  and  greatly  Enlarged. 
BUILDING  CONSTRUCTION.  A  Text-Book  on  the 
Principles  and  Details  of  Modern  Construction,  for  the  use  of 
Students  and  Practical  Men.  By  Charles  F.  Mitchell, 
assisted  by  George  A.  Mitchell.  Part  2. — Advanced  and 
Honours  Courses.  Containing  800  pp.  of  Text,  with  750 
Illustrations,  fully  dimensioned,  many  being  full-page  or  double 
plates,  with  constructional  details.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  5s.  6(/. 

"Mr.  Mitchell's  two  books  form  unquestionably  the  best  guide  to  all  the  mechanical 
part  of  architecture  which  any  student  can  obtain  at  the  present  moment.  In  fact,  so  far 
as  it  is  possible  for  any  one  to  compile  a  satisfactory  treatise  on  building  construction,  Mr. 
Mitchell  has  performed  the  task  as  well  as  it  can  be  performed." — The  Builder. 

BRICKWORK  AND  MASONRY.  A  Practical  Text-book 
for  Students  and  those  engaged  in  the  Design  and  Execution 
of  Structures  in  Brick  and  Stone.  By  Charles  F.  Mitchell 
and  George  A.  Mitchell.  Being  a  thoroughly  revised  and 
remodelled  edition  of  the  chapters  on  these  subjects  from  the 
Authors'  "Elementary"  and  "Advanced  Building  Construc- 
tion," with  special  additional  chapters  and  new  Illustrations. 
400  pp.,  with  about  600  illustrations.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  5^. 

"  Regarded  in  its  entirety,  this  is  a  most  valuable  work.  It  is  not  a  treatise,  as  the  term 
is  generally  understood,  but  a  compendium  of  useful  information  admirably  collated  and 
well  ilhxstrated,  and  as  such  has  a  distinct  sphere  of  usefulness."— T/ie  Builder. 

FORTY  PLATES  ON    BUILDING  CONSTRUCTION. 

— Including  Brickwork,  Masonry,  Carpentry,  Joinery,  Plumb- 
ing, Constructional  Ironwork,  &c.,  &c.  By  C.  F.  Mitchell. 
Revised  by  Technical  Teachers  at  the  Polytechnic  Institute. 
The  size  of  each  Plate  is  20  in.  by  12  in.  Price,  in  sheets, 
55.  Od.     Or  bound  in  cloth,  10s.  Gc?. 

DRY  ROT  IN  TIMBER.  By  W.  H.  Bidlake,  A.R.I.B.A. 
With  numerous  Diagrams.     8vo,  cloth,  Is.  6o?. 


A71  entirely  Hew  and   Up-fo-Date  Treatise,  coMaiaing  the  results  of  a  Unique 
Practical  Experience  of  Tiventy-five  Years, 

MODERN  PRACTICAL  CARPENTRY.  By  George 
Ellis,  Author  of  "Modern  Practical  Joinery,"  &c.  Containing 
a  full  description  of  the  methods  of  Constructing  and  Erecting 
Roofs,  Floors,  Partitions,  Scaffolding,  Shoring,  Centering, 
Stands  and  Stages,  Coffer  Dams,  Foundations,  Bridges,  Gates, 
Tunnels,  Excavations,  Wood  and  Half-Timber  Houses,  and 
various  Structural  Details;  together  with  new  and  simple 
methods  of  Finding  the  Bevels  in  Roofs,  Setting  Out  Domes, 
Steeples,  tfec.  ;  the  Uses  of  the  Steel  Square ;  Notes  on  the 
Woods  used;  and  a  Glossary  of  Terms.  450  pages,  with 
1,100  clear  and  practical  Illustrations.  Large  8vo,  cloth, 
12s.  6c?.  net. 

"  A  handsome  and  substantial  volume.  The  project  has  been  well  earned  out.  It 
excels  nearly  all  in  its  completeness." — The  Carpenter  and  Builder. 

"  The  book  is  full  of  sound  practical  matter.  It  is  profusely  illustrated  with  the 
clearest  of  line  drawings  and  photographs,  not  mere  sketches,  but  working  drawings  of 
the  highest  possible  value.  Anyone  confronted  with  an  unusual  difficulty  would  almost 
surely  find  its  solution  somewhere  in  the  volume." — The  Building  News. 

MODERN  PRACTICAL  JOINERY.  A  Guide  to  the 
Preparation  of  all  kinds  of  House  Joinery,  Bank,  Office, 
Church,  Museum  and  Shop-fittings,  Air-tight  Cases,  and 
Shaped  Work,  with  a  full  description  of  Hand-tools  and  their 
uses.  Workshop  Practice,  Fittings  and  Appliances,  also 
Directions  for  Fixing,  the  Setting-out  of  Rods,  Reading  of 
Plans,  and  Preparation  of  Working  Drawings,  Notes  on 
Timber,  and  a  Glossary  of  Terms,  &c.  By  George  Ellis, 
Author  of  "  Modern  Practical  Carpentry."  Containing 
380  pages,  with  1,000  practical  Illustrations.  Large  8vo, 
cloth,  125.  6c?.  net. 

"  In  this  excellent  work  the  mature  fruits  of  the  first-hand  practical  experience  of  an 
exceptionally  skilful  and  intelligent  craftsman  are  given.  It  is  a  credit  to  the  author'* 
talent  and  industry,  and  is  likely  to  remain  an  enduring  monument  to  British  craftsman- 
ehi]^."— Building  World. 

PLASTERING  —  PLAIN     AND      DECORATIVE.       A 

Practical  Treatise  on  the  Art  and  Craft  of  Plastering  and 
Modelling.  Including  full  descriptions  of  the  various  Tools, 
Materials,  Processes,  and  Appliances  employed,  and  chapters 
on  Concrete  Work,  both  plain  and  reinforced.  By  William 
Millar.  Containing  600  pp.  Illustrated  by  53  full-page 
Plates,  and  about  500  smaller  Diagrams  in  the  Text.  3rd 
Edition,  Revised  and  Enlarged.    Thick  4to,  cloth,  18s.  net. 

*' '  Millar  on  Plastering  '  may  be  expected  to  be  the  standard  authority  on  the  subject 
for  many  years  to  come,  and  we  congratulate  the  author  on  having  left  such  a  legacy  to 
his  craft  as  will  connect  his  name  with  it  as  intimately  and  as  durably  as  that  of 
Tredgold  with  Carpentry A  truly  monumental  v^ovk."— 'The  Builder. 


PKOFESSOR  BANISTER    FLETCHER'S   VALUABLE   TEXT-BOOKS    FOR 
ARCHITECTS  AND  SURVEYORS. 

Arranged  in  Tabulated  Form  and  fully  indexed  for  ready  reference. 
QUANTITIES.  A  Text-Book  explanatory  of  the  best  methods 
adopted  in  the  measurement  of  builders'  work.  Seventh 
Edition,  revised  and  enlarged  by  H.  Phillips  Fletcher, 
F.R.LB.A.,  F.S.I.  With  special  chapters  on  Cubing,  Priced 
Schedules,  Grouping,  the  Law,  &c.,  and  a  typical  example 
of  the  complete  Taking-off,  Abstracting,  and  Billing  in  all 
Trades.  Containing  460  pages;  with  82  Illustrations.  Crown 
8vo,  cloth,  7s.  6cZ. 
The  most  Complete,  Concise,  and  Handy  Work  on  the  Subject. 

"  It  is  no  doubt  the  best  work  on  the  subject  extant."— ITie  Builder. 

*'  A  good  treatise  by  a  competent  master  of  his  subject.  .  .  .  Indispensable  to 
every  architectural  or  surveying  student."— JTie  Building  News. 

"  Those  who  remember  the  earlier  editions  of  this  work  will  thoroughly  appreciate  the 
increase  in  size  and  the  great  improvement  in  quality  of  this  last  edition,  which  certainly 
makes  it  one  of  the  most  complete  works  upon  the  subject."— TTie  Builder's  Journal. 

"We  compliment  Mr.  Fletcher  on  his  revision  and  on  the  accuracy  of  the  book 
generally."- TTie  Surveyor. 

DILAPIDATIONS.     A  text-book  on  the  Law  and  Practice  of. 

With  the  various  Acts  relating  thereto,  and  special  chapters 
on  Ecclesiastical  Dilapidations  and  on  Fixtures.  Sixth  Edition, 
revised  and  remodelled,  with  recent  Legal  Cases  and  Acts,  by 
Banister  F.  Fletcher,  F.Pv.I.B.A.,  F.S.I.,  and  H.  Phillips 
Fletcher,  F.R.LB.A.,  F.S.L,  Barrister-at-Law.  Crown  8vo, 
cloth,  6s.  6(i. 

LIGHT  AND  AIR.  With  Methods  of  Estimating  Injuries,  &c. 
Fourth  Edition,  revised  and  enlarged  by  Banister  F. 
Fletcher  and  H.  Phillips  Fletcher.  With  full  Reports  and 
Digests  of  Ruling  Cases,  and  27  Coloured  Diagrams,  kc. 
Crown  8vo,  cloth,  Qs.  6o?. 

"By  far  the  most  complete  and  practical  text-book  we  have  seen.  In  it  will  be  found 
the  cream  of  all  the  legal  definitions  and  decisions."- BuiZding  News. 

VALUATIONS  AND  COMPENSATIONS.  A  Text-Book 
on  the  Practice  of  Valuing  Property,  and  the  Law  of  Com- 
pensations in  relation  thereto.  Third  Edition,  rewritten 
and  enlarged  by  Banister  F.  Fletcher  and  H.  Phillips 
Fletcher,  with  Appendices  of  Forms,  ifec,  and  many  new 
Valuation  Tables.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  6s.  M. 

"  Very  useful  to  students  preparing  for  the  examination  of  the  Surveyors'  Institution." 

—  The  Sui-veyor, 

ARBITRATIONS.  Third  Edition,  revised  and  largely  re- 
written, by  Banister  F.  Fletcher  and  H.  Phillips  Fletcher. 
With  references  to  the  chief  governing  cases,  and  an  Appendix 
of  Forms,  Statutes,  Rules,  &c.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  gilt,  5s.  M. 

'•  It  is  as  well  written  and  revised  as  can  be,  and  we  doubt  if  it  would  be  possible  to 
find  a  more  satisfactory  handbook." — The  Builder. 


PROFESSOR  SANISTER  FLETCHER'S  VALUABLE  TEXT-BOOKS  FOB 
ARCHITECTS  AND  SVaY-EYORS— continued. 

THE    LONDON    BUILDING    ACTS,    1894-1905.     A 

Text-Book  on  the  Law  relating  to  Building  in  the  Metropolis. 
Containing  the  Acts,  in  extenso,  together  with  the  unrepealed 
Sections  of  all  other  Acts  affecting  building,  the  latest  Bye- 
Laws  and  Regulations,  Notes  on  the  Acts  and  abstracts  of 
the  latest  decisions  and  cases.  Fourth  Edition,  thoroughly 
revised  by  Banister  F.  Fletcher,  F.R.I.B.A.,  F.S.L,  and 
H,  Phillips  Fletcher,  F.R.I.B.A.,  F.S.L,  Barrister-at-Law. 
With  23  Coloured  Plates,  showing  the  thickness  of  walls, 
plans  of  chimneys,  &c.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  6s.  6d. 

"  It  is  the  Law  of  Building  for  London  in  one  volume." — Architect. 
"  Illustrated  by  a  series  of  invaluable  coloured  plates,  showing  clearly  the  meaning  of 
the  various  clauses  as  regards  construction."— 2'Ae  Surveyor. 


I 


L 


CONDITIONS  OF  CONTRACT  relating  to  Building 
Works.  By  Frank  W.  Macey,  Architect.  Revised,  as  to 
the  strictly  legal  matter,  by  B.  J.  Leverson,  Barrister-at- 
Law.      Royal  8vo,  cloth,  15s.  net. 

ESTIMATING  :  A  Method  op  Pricing  Builders'  Quantitibs 
FOR  Competitive  Work.  By  George  Stephenson.  Showing 
how  to  prepare,  without  the  use  of  a  Price  Book,  the  Estimates 
of  the  work  to  be  done  in  the  various  Trades  throughout 
a  large  Villa  Residence.  Sixth  Edition,  the  Prices  carefully 
revised  to  date.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  4s.  6d.  net. 

"  The  author,  evidently  a  man  who  has  had  experience,  enables  everyone  to  enter,  aa 
It  were,  into  a  builder's  office  and  see  how  schedules  are  made  out.  The  novice  will  find  a 
good  many  '  wrinkles '  in  the  hook."— Architect. 

REPAIRS  :  How  to  Measure  and  Value  them.  A  Hand- 
book for  the  use  of  Builders,  Decorators,  &c.  By  George 
Stephenson,  Author  of  "  Estimating."  Fourth  Edition,  the 
prices  carefully  revised.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  3s.  net. 

'• '  Repairs '  is  a  very  serviceable  handbook  on  the  subject.  A  good  specification  for 
repairs  is  given  by  the  author,  and  then  he  proceeds,  from  the  top  floor  downwards,  to 
show  how  to  value  the  items,  by  a  method  of  framing  the  estimate  in  the  measuring  book. 
The  modus  operandi  is  simple  and  soon  learnt." — TTie  Building  News. 

FACTS  ON  FIRE  PREVENTION.  An  enquiry  into  the 
Fire-Resisting  Qualities  of  the  chief  Materials  and  Systems  of 
Construction,  conducted  by  the  British  Fire  Prevention  Com- 
mittee. Edited  by  Edwin  0.  Sachs,  Author  of  *'  Modern 
Theatres."  Containing  Accounts  of  Tests  of  Floors,  Ceilings, 
Partitions,  Doors,  Curtains,  &c.,  with  100  Full-page  Plates. 
2  vols.   Large  8vo,  cloth,  25s.  net. 


STRESSES  AND  THRUSTS.  A  Text-Book  on  their 
Determination  in  Constructional  Work,  with  Examples 
OF  the  Design  of  Girders  and  Roofs,  for  the  use  of 
Students.  By  G.  A.  T.  Middleton,  A.R.I.B.A.  Third  Edi- 
tion, revised  and  much  enlarged.  With  170  Illustrative 
Diagrams  and  Folding  Plates.     8vo,  cloth,  4s.  6d.  net. 

"  The  student  of  building  construction  will  find  all  he  ought  to  know  as  to  the  relation 
of  stresses  and  thrusts  to  the  work  he  may  be  engaged  in.  The  varying  degrees  of  streea 
are  calculated  in  a  simple  way,  so  that  the  merest  tyro  in  mathematics  will  be  able  to 
appreciate  and  apply  the  principles  laid  down." — The  Surveyor. 

THE    ELEMENTARY    PRINCIPLES    OF    GRAPHIC 

Statics.  Specially  prepared  for  the  use  of  Students  enter- 
ing for  the  Examinations  in  Building  Construction  of  the  Board 
of  Education.  By  Edward  Hardy,  Teacher  of  Building  Con- 
struction.   With  150  Illustrations.    Crown  8vo,  cloth,  3«.  net. 

Prof.  Henry  Adams,  writing  to  the  Author,  says  : — "  You  have  treated  the  subject 
in  a  rery  clear  and  logical  manner,  and  I  shall  certainly  recommend  the  book  to  my 
elementary  students  as  the  best  of  its  kind." 

TREATISE  ON  SHORING  AND  UNDERPINNING 
and  generally  dealing  with  Dangerous  Structures. 
By  C.  H.  Stock,  Architect  and  Surveyor.  Third  Edition, 
thoroughly  revised  by  F.  R.  Farrow,  F.R.I.B.A.,  fully 
illustrated.    Large  8vo,  cloth,  4s.  6c?. 

"The  treatise  is  a  valuable  addition  to  the  practical  library  of  the  architect  and 
builder,  and  we  heartily  recommend  it  to  all  readers." — Building  News. 

DANGEROUS  STRUCTURES  and  How  to  Deal  with 
them.  A  Handbook  for  Practical  Men.  By  G.  H.  Blagrove, 
Certified  Surveyor  under  the  London  Building  Act,  1894. 
Second  Edition,  re-written  and  much  enlarged,  With  35 
Illustrations.     Crown  8vo,  4s.  6d.  net. 

This  volume  deals  with  some  of  those  awkward  problems  in 
building  which  demand  prompt  solution.  It  describes  ready 
means  for  getting  over  difiiculties  which  frequently  occur  in 
practice,  and  supplies  data  from  which  efficient,  and  at  the  same 
time  economical,  remedies  may  be  designed  to  counteract  evils 
arising  from  structural  defects. 

SCAFFOLDING  :  A  Treatise  on  the  Design  and  Erec- 
tion of  Scaffolds,  Gantries,  and  Stagings,  with  an 
account  of  the  Appliances  used  in  connection  therewith, 
and  a  Chapter  on  the  Legal  Aspect  of  the  Question.  By 
A.  G.  H.  Thatcher,  Building  Surveyor.  Illustrated  by  146 
Diagrams  and  6  Full-page  Plates.     Large  8vo,  cloth,  6s.  net. 

"  A  really  valuable  little  treatise."— TAe  Builder. 

CONCRETE:  ITS  USE  IN  BUILDING.  By  Thomas 
Potter.  Second  Edition,  greatly  enlarged.  500  pp.  of  Text, 
and  100  Illustrations.     2  vols.,  crown  8vo,  cloth,  7s.  6d. 


I 

I 


THE     DRAINAGE     OF     TOWN     AND     COUNTRY 

Houses.  A  Practical  Account  of  Modern  Sanitary  Ar- 
rangements and  Fittings  for  the  Use  of  Architects,  Builders, 
Sanitary  Inspectors,  and  those  preparing  for  examinations 
in  Sanitary  Science.  By  G.  A.  T.  Middleton,  A.R.I.B.A. 
With  a  special  chapter  on  the  Disposal  of  Sewage  on  a  small 
scale,  including  a  description  of  the  Bacterial  Method.  With 
93  Illustrations.     Large  8vo,  cloth,  4s.  Qd.  net. 

"  A  very  complete  exposition  of  the  principles  and  details  of  modem  practice  in  this 
branch  of  design  and  work.  ...  It  will  well  repay  consultation  by  every  one  called 
upon  to  deal  with  the  problem  of  domestic  sanitation  from  the  constructional  side." — 
The  Surveyor. 

"  Very  reliable  and  practical." — The  Plumber  and  Decorator. 

THE  PLUMBER  AND  SANITARY  HOUSES.  A  Prac- 
tical Treatise  on  the  Principles  of  Internal  Plumbing  Work. 
By  S.  Stevens  Hbllybr.  Sixth  Edition,  revised  and  enlarged. 
Containing  30  lithographic  Plates  and  262  woodcut  Illustra- 
tions.    Thick  royal  8vo,  cloth,  12s.  6d. 

PRINCIPLES  AND   PRACTICE  OF   PLUMBING.  By 

S.  Stevens  Hellyer.  Fifth  Edition.  Containing  294  pp.  of 
text  and  180  practical  Illustrations.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  5s. 

TECHNICAL  PLUMBING.  A  Handbook  for  Students  and 
Practical  Men.  By  S.  Barlow  Bennett,  Lecturer  on  Sanitary 
Engineering  to  the  Durham  County  Council.  Second  Edition, 
revised,  with  about  500  Illustrations.  Large  8vo,  cloth, 
3s.  6d.  net. 
Entirely  New  and  Improved  Edition,  superseding  all  previoics  issues. 

CLARKE'S    TABLES     AND     MEMORANDAT^FOR 

Plumbers,  Builders,  Sanitary  Engineers,  &c.    By  J. 

Wright  Clarke,  M.S.I.  With  a  new  section  of  Electrical 
Memoranda.   312  pages,  small  pocket  size,  leather.  Is.  6d.  net. 

"It  is  obviously  one  of  those  things  a  tradesman  should  carry  in  his  pocket  as 
religiously  as  he  does  a  foot  rule." — Plumber  and  Decorator. 

"The  amount  of  information  this  excellent  little  work  contains  is  marvellous."— 
Sanitary  Record. 

PRACTICAL    SCIENCE     FOR     PLUMBERS     AND 

Engineering  Students.  By  J.  Wright  Clarke.  Treat- 
ing of  Physics,  Metals,  Hydraulics,  Heat,  Temperature,  <kc., 
and  their  application  to  the  problems  of  practical  work. 
With  about  200  Illustrations.     Large  8vo,  cloth,  5s.  net. 

PUMPS:    Their   Principles   and    Construction.     By  J. 

Wright  Clarke.  With  73  Illustrations.  Second  Edition, 
thoroughly  revised.     8vo,  cloth,  3s.  6(i.  net. 

HYDRAULIC  RAMS:  Their  Principles  and  Construc- 
tion.   By  J.  Wright  Clarke.    With  36  Diagrams.    8vo,  2«. 


A  thoroughly  comprehensive  and  practical  Treatise. 
SANITARY  ENGINEERING.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  the 
Collection,  Removal  and  Final  Disposal  of  Sewage,  and  the 
Design  and  Construction  of  Works  of  Drainage  and  Sewerage, 
with  special  chapters  on  the  Disposal  of  House  Refuse  and 
Sewage  Sludge,  and  numerous  Hydraulic  Tables,  Formulae 
and  Memoranda,  including  an  extensive  Series  of  Tables  of 
Velocity  and  Discharge  of  Pipes  and  Sewers.  By  Colonel 
E.  C.  S.  Moore,  R.E.,  M.R.S.I.  Second  Edition,  thoroughly 
revised  and  greatly  enlarged.  Containing  830  pp.  of  Text, 
140  Tables,  860  Illustrations,  including  92  large  Folding 
Plates.     Large  thick  8vo,  cloth,  32s.  net. 

" .  .  .  The  book  is  indeed  a  full  and  complete  epitome  of  the  latest  practice  in 
ganitary  engineering,  and  as  a  book  of  reference  it  is  simply  indispensable."— T^e  Public 
Health  Engineer. 

WATERWORKS  DISTRIBUTION.  A  Practical  Guide  to 
the  Laying  Out  of  Systems  of  distributing  Mains  for  the 
Supply  of  Water  to  Cities  and  Towns.  By  J.  A.  McPherson, 
A.M. Inst. C.E.  Fully  illustrated  by  19  Diagrams  and  103 
other  Illustrations,  together  with  a  Large  (^hart  (29"  x  20") 
of  an  Example  District.  Second  Edition,  revised  and  en- 
larged with  further  Diagrams.  Large  crown  8vo,  cloth,  6s.  net. 

GAS  FITTING.  A  Practical  Handbook  relating  to  the 
Distribution  of  Gas  in  Service  Pipes,  the  Use  of  Coal  Gas, 
and  the  best  Means  of  Economizing  Gas  from  Main  to 
Burner.  By  Walter  Grafton,  F.C.S.,  Chemist  at  the 
Beckton  Works  of  the  Gas  Light  and  Coke  Co.  With  143 
Illustrations.     Large  crown  8vo,  cloth,  5s.  net. 

"  The  author  is  a  recognised  authority  upon  the  subject  of  gas  lighting,  and  gasfittera 
and  others  who  intend  to  study  gasfitting  in  practical  detail  will  find  the  book  most 
serviceable."— r^e  Builder. 

STABLE     BUILDING    AND    STABLE    FITTING.      A 

Handbook  for  the  Use  of  Architects,  Builders,  and  Horse 
Owners.  By  Byng  Giraud,  Architect.  With  56  Plates  and 
72  Illustrations  in  the  Text.  Crown  8vo,  cloth,  7s.  6c?. 

Adopted  as  the  Text-book  by  the  Surveyors'  Institution. 
FARM  BUILDINGS:  Their  Construction  and  Arrangement. 
By  A.  Dudley  Clarke,  F.S.I.  With  chapters  on  Cottages, 
Homesteads  for  Small  Holdings,  Iron  and  Wood  Roofs,  Repairs 
and  Materials,  Notes  on  Sanitary  Matters,  &c.  Third 
Edition,  revised  and  enlarged.  With  52  full-page  and  other 
Illustrations  of  plans,  elevations,  sections,  details  of  construc- 
tion, ifec.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  6s.  net. 

"  To  architects  and  surveyors,  whose  lot  it  may  be  to  plan  or  modify  buildings  of  the 
kind,  the  volume  will  be  of  singular  service." — Builder' s  Journal. 


I 

I 


RESIDENTIAL  FLATS  OF  ALL  CLASSES,  including 

Artisans'  Dwellings.  A  Practical  Treatise  on  their 
Planning  and  Arrangement,  together  with  chapters  on  their 
History,  Financial  Matters,  (fee.  With  numerous  Illustra- 
tions. By  Sydney  Perks,  F.R.I.B.A.,  P.A.S.I.  vVith  a  large 
number  of  plans  of  important  Examples  by  leading  architects 
in  England,  the  Continent,  and  America;  also  numerous 
Views  from  Special  Photographs.  Containing  300  pages, 
with  226  Illustrations.     Imperial  8vo,  cloth,  21s.  net. 

"A  standard  -work  of  considerable  importance." — The  Building  News. 
"  Altogether  it  is  a  book  which  is  not  only  unique  in  architectural  literature,  but  is 
one  of  which  every  page  has  a  practical  tendency." — The  Architect. 

MODERN  SCHOOL  BUILDINGS,  Elementary  and 
Secondary.  A  Treatise  on  the  Planning,  Arrangement  and 
Fitting  of  Day  and  Boarding  Schools.  With  special  chapters 
on  the  Treatment  of  Class-Rooms,  Lighting,  Warming,  Ventila- 
tion and  Sanitation.  By  Felix  Clay,  B.A.,  Architect.  Second 
Edition,  thoroughly  revised  and  enlarged.  Containing  556 
pp.  with  450  Illustrations  of  Plans,  Perspective  Views,  Con- 
structive Details  and  Fittings.     Imperial  8vo,  cloth,  25s.  net. 

"Mr.  Clay  has  produced  a  work  of  real  and  lasting  value.  It  reflects  great  credit  on 
his  industry,  ability,  and  judgment,  and  is  likely  to  remain  for  some  time  the  leading 
work  on  the  architectural  requirements  of  secondary  education."— TAe  Builder. 

PUBLIC  BATHS  AND  WASH-HOUSES.  A  Treatise 
on  their  Planning,  Design,  Arrangement  and  Fitting ;  with 
chapters  on  Turkish,  Russian,  and  other  special  Baths,  Public 
Laundries,  Engineering,  Heating,  Water  Supply,  &c.  By 
A.  W.  S.  Ckoss,  M.A.,  F.R.I.B.A.  284  pages,  with  274  illus- 
trations  of  modern  examples.     Imperial  8vo,  cloth,  21s.  net. 

PUBLIC  LIBRARIES.  A  Treatise  on  their  Design,  Con- 
struction, and  Fittings,  with  a  Chapter  on  the  Principles  of 
Planning,  and  a  Summary  of  the  Law.  By  Amian  L. 
Champneys,  B.A.,  Architect.  Containing  about  200  pages, 
with  over  100  Illustrations  of  Modern  Examples  and  Fittings 
from  Photographs  and  Drawings.     Imperial  8vo,  12s.  6d.  net. 

THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  PLANNING.  An  Analytical 
Treatise  for  the  Use  of  Architects  and  others.  By  Percy 
L.  Marks,  Architect.  With  Notes  on  the  Requirements  of 
Different  Classes  of  Buildings.  Illustrated  by  150  Plans, 
mainly  of  important  modern  Buildings.  Second  edition, 
revised  and  enlarged.     Large  8vo,  cloth,  8s.  Qd.  net. 

"  For  a  single-handed  attempt  to  grapple  with  such  a  widely  extending  subject,  the 
author  has  really  done  very  well.  Labour  he  has  clearly  not  stinted,  and  his  success  in 
arranging  his  large  amount  of  material  is  worthy  of  much  praise." — The  Builder. 


10 

ARCHITECTURAL  SKETCHING  AND  DRAWING 
IN  PERSPECTIVE.  A  progressive  series  of  36  Plates, 
illustrating  the  Drawing  of  Architectural  Details  and  Sketch- 
ing to  Scale ;  including  chapters  on  the  Plan  and  Measuring 
Point  Methods,  the  Simplification  of  Perspective  by  R's 
method,  and  on  Figures,  Foliage,  &c.  By  H.  W.  Roberts, 
Author  of  "R's  Method."  Large  imperial  8vo,  cloth, 
7s.  6d.  net. 

This  book  provides  a  progressive  course  of  perspective  drawing, 
founded  to  some  extent  upon  the  well-known  R's  Method,  showing 
its  application  to  various  problems  of  practical  work.  Its  aim  is  to 
present  perspective  drawing  in  a  simple  form,  and  to  aid  the  draughts- 
man by  placing  at  his  disposal  various  practical  expedients  to  simplify 
the  details  of  his  work. 

THE  PRINCIPLES  OF  ARCHITECTURAL  PER- 
SPECTIVE, prepared  for  the  use  of  Students,  &c.  with 
chapters  on  Isometric  Drawing  and  the  Preparation  of 
Finished  Perspectives.  By  G.  A.  T.  Middleton,  A.R.LB.A. 
Illustrated  with  51  Diagrams,  and  9  full-page  and  folding 
Plates,  including  a  series  of  finished  perspective  views  of  build- 
ings by  various  Architects.     Demy  8vo,  cloth,  2s.  6d.  net. 

ARCHITECTURAL  DRAWING.  A  Text-Book  with  special 
reference  to  artistic  design.  By  R.  Phene  Spiers,  F.S.A. 
With  28  full-page  and  folding  Plates.    4to,  cloth,  8s.  6d.  net. 

ALPHABETS  OLD  AND  NEW.  Containing  200  com- 
plete Alphabets,  30  series  of  Numerals,  and  numerous  fac- 
similes of  Ancient  Dates,  &c.,  with  an  Essay  on  Art  in  the 
Alphabet.  By  Lewis  F.  Day.  Second  Edition,  revised,  with 
many  new  examples.     Crown  8vo,  cloth,  3s.  6d.  net. 

"  Everyone  who  employs  practical  lettering  will  be  grateful  for  '  Alphabets,  Old  and 
New,'  Mr.  Day  has  written  a  scholarly  and  pithy  introduction,  and  contributes  some 
beautiful  alphabets  of  his  own  design." — The  Art  Journal. 

A  HANDBOOK  OF  ORNAMENT.  With  300  Plates, 
containing  about  3,000  Illustrations  of  the  Elements  and  the 
application  of  Decoration  to  Objects.  By  F.  S.  Meyer, 
Third  Edition,  revised.     Thick  8vo,  cloth,  12s.  6d. 

"  A  Library,  a  Museum,  an  Encyclopaedia,  and  an  Art  School  in  one.  The  work  is 
practically  an  epitome  of  a  hundred  Works  on  Design."— The  Studio. 

A  HANDBOOK  OF  ART  SMITHING.     For   the   use  of 

Practical  Smiths,  Designers,  Architects,  (fee.  By  F.  S. 
Meyer.  With  an  Introduction  by  J.  Starkie  Gardner. 
Containing  214  Illustrations.     Demy  8vo,  cloth,  65. 

"  An  excellent,  clear,  intelligent,  and,  so  far  as  its  size  permits,  complete  account 
of  the  craft  of  working  in  iron  for  decorative  purposes."— 77i«  Athen(Tum. 


11 

HOMES  FOR  THE  COUNTRY.  A  Collection  of  Designs 
and  Examples  of  recently  executed  works.  By  R,  A.  Briggs, 
Architect,  F.R.I.B.A,  Soane  Medallist,  Author  of  "  Bunga- 
lows." Containing  48  full-page  Plates  of  Exterior  and  Interior 
Views  and  Plans.  With  descriptive  notes.  Demy  4to,  cloth, 
10s.  6d.  net. 

"  The  arrangement  of  the  plans  generally  reveala  a  masterhand  at  this  class  of  archi- 
tecture."—jTAe  Fall  Mall  Gazette. 


I 


BUNGALOWS  AND   COUNTRY   RESIDENCES.     A 

Series  of  Designs  and  Examples  of  recently  executed  works. 
By  B.  A.  Briggs,  F.R.I.B.A.  Fifth  and  Enlarged  Edition, 
containing  47  Plates,  with  descriptions,  and  notes  of  cost  of 
each  house.     Demy  4to,  cloth,  12s.  Qd. 

"  Those  who  desire  grace  and  originality  in  their  suburban  dwellings  might  take 
many  a  valuable  hint  from  this  book." — The  Times. 

IB  A  BOOK  OF  COUNTRY  HOUSES.  Containing  62  Plates 
^^M  reproduced  from  Photographs  and  Drawings  of  Perspective 
^^K  Views  and  Plans  of  a  variety  of  executed  examples,  ranging 
^^H  in  size  from  a  moderate-sized  Suburban  House  to  a  fairly 
^^H  large  Mansion.  By  Ernest  Newton,  Architect.  Imperial 
^^B         4to,  cloth,  21s.  net. 

^^^K  The  houses  illustrated  in  this  volume  may  be  taken  as  representa- 

^^Hf  tive  of  the  English  Country  House  of  the  present  day.     They  offer 

V^Kl  much  variety  in  their  size,  their  sites,  the  character  of  the  materials 

I^^P  in  which  they  are  constructed,  and  their  types  of  plan. 

THE  COUNTRY  HOUSE.  A  Practical  Manual  of  the 
Planning  and  Construction  of  Country  Homes  and  their 
Surroundings.  By  Charles  E.  Hooper.  Containing  350  pp., 
with  about  400  Illustrations,  comprising  photographic  views^ 
plans,  details,  &g.     Crown  4to,  cloth,  15s.  net. 

This  volume  afifords  hints  and  pi-actical  advice  on  the  selection  of  the  site,  the 
planning,  the  practical  details  of  construction  and  sanitation,  the  artistic  treatment  of  the 
interior,  and  the  laj'ing-out  of  the  grounds.  Although  written  by  an  American  for 
Americans,  there  is  a  great  deal  which  is  particularly  applicable  to  English  homes,  and 
much  of  the  architecture  illustrated  is  strongly  reminiscent  of  the  work  of  some  of  our 
best  Enghsh  architects. 

MODERN  COTTAGE  ARCHITECTURE,  Illustrated 
from  Works  of  well-known  Architects.  Edited, 
with  an  Essay  on  Cottage  Building,  and  descriptive  notes  on 
the  subjects,  by  Maurice  B.  Adams,  F.R.I.B.A.  Containing 
50  plates  of  Perspective  Views  and  Plans  of  the  best  types 
of  English  Country  Cottages.    Royal  4to,  cloth,  lOs.  6d.  net. 

■        "The  cottages  which  Mr.  Adams  has  selected  would  do  credit  to  any  estate  ir» 
England."— r/ie  Architect. 
"It  should  meet  with  a  large  sale.    The  author  has  been  wise  enough  to  get  together 
a  varied  style  of  design  by  various  architects  who  have  shown  marked  ability  in  this 
direotion."— TAt  JBritifth  Architect. 


12 

MODERN  SUBURBAN  HOUSES.  A  Series  of  Examples 
erected  at  Hampstead,  Bickley,  and  in  Surrey,  from  designs 
by  C.  H.  B.  QuENNELL,  Architect.  Containing  44  Plates  of 
Exterior  and  Interior  Views,  reproduced  from  special  photo- 
graphs, and  large  scale  plans  from  the  author's  drawings. 
Large  4to,  cloth,  16s.  net. 

Cleverly  planned,  of  quiet  refined  design,  and  financially  successful, 
Mr.  Quennell's  examples  clearly  demonstrate  that  it  is  not  necessary 
to  rely  on  characterless  designs  and  stock  patterns  for  our  suburban 
houses,  as  is  often  the  case  with  the  speculative  builder. 

MODERN    HOUSING    IN  TOWN  AND   COUNTRY. 

Illustrated  by  examples  of  mmiicipal  and  other  schemes  of 
Block  Dwellings,  Tenement  Houses,  Model  Cottages  and 
Villages,  and  the  Garden  City,  together  with  the  Plans  and 
other  illustrations  of  the  Cottages  designed  for  the  Cheap 
Cottages  Exhibition.  By  James  Cornes.  With  many  Plans 
and  Views  from  Drawings  and  Photographs,  accompanied  by 
descriptive  text.     Royal  4to,  cloth,  7s.  6c/.  net. 

"Its  value  is  great.  Its  size  enables  the  illustrations  to  be  satisfactory  in  scale;  its 
price,  for  a  book  so  copiously  illustrated,  is  surprisingly  low ;  it  will,  doubtless,  be  accepted 
for  some  time  to  come  as  a  standard  book  of  reference  on  the  subject."'— T^e  Times. 

HOUSES  FOR  THE  WORKING  CLASSES.  Com- 
prising 52  typical  and  improved  Plans,  arranged  in  groups, 
with  elevations  for  each  group,  block  plans,  and  details.  By 
S.  W.  Cranfield,  A.R.I.B.A  ,  and  H.  I.  Potter,  A.R.I.B.A. 
With  descriptive  text,  including  Notes  on  the  Treatment  and 
Planning  of  Small  Houses,  Tables  of  Sizes  of  Rooms,  Cubic 
Contents,  Cost,  &c.  Second  Edition,  revised  and  enlarged, 
with  many  additional  plans.     Imperial  4to,  cloth,  21s.  net. 

This  book  deals  with  Cottages  suitable  for  the  Working  Classes  in 
Suburban  and  Eural  Districts.  The  majority  of  the  examples  illustrated 
consist  of  two  and  three-storey  dwellings,  adapted  to  be  built  in  pairs, 
groups  or  terraces,  and  vary  in  cost  from  about  £1.50  to  £400. 

"  As  a  book  of  types  of  the  best  examples  of  houses  of  this  kind,  the  work  is  the  most 
complete  we  have  seen." — The  Building  News. 

"  The  book  meets  a  distinct  want.  The  subject  is  not  written  round,  but  thoroughly 
threshed  out ;  and  what  with  good  illustrations  to  scale,  clear  letterpress,  and  abundant 
tables  of  areas,  &c.,  there  is  no  lack  of  information  for  those  in  search  of  it.  We  con- 
gratulate the  authors  on  their  enterprise." — The  Sun-eyor. 

THE  MODEL  VILLAGE  AND  ITS  COTTAGES: 
BOURNVILLE.  Illustrated  by  57  Plates,  consisting  of 
38  views  from  specially  taken  photographs,  and  19  plans  and 
details  of  the  Village  and  its  Cottages,  with  a  descriptive 
account,  and  some  notes  on  economic  Cottage-building  and 
the  laying-out  of  Model  Villages.  By  W.  Alexander  Harvey, 
Architect.     Large  8vo,  cloth,  8s.  6c/.  net. 


13 

A  HISTORY  OF  ARCHITECTURE  ON  THE  COM- 
PARATIVE METHOD  for  the  Student,  Craftsman, 
and  Amateur.  By  Banister  Fletcher,  F.R.LB.A.,  late 
Professor  of  Architecture  in  King's  College,  London,  and 
Banister  F.  Fletcher,  F.R.I.B.A.  Containing  800  pp., 
with  300  full-page  Illustrations,  reproduced  from  photo- 
graphs of  Buildings  and  from  specially  prepared  drawings  of 
constructive  detail  and  ornament,  comprising  over  2,000 
Illustrations.  Fifth  Edition,  thoroughly  revised  and  greatly 
enlarged.     Demy  8vo,  cloth,  2l5.  net. 

"  Par  excellence  The  Student's  Manual  of  the  History  of  Architecture." — The 
Architect. 

".  .  .  It  is  concisely  written  and  profusely  illustrated  by  plates  of  all  the  typical  build- 
ings of  each  country  and  period.  .  .  .  Will  FILL  A  VOID  IN  OUR  Literature."— ^uiYdm^'jVews. 

"...    As  COMPLETE  AS  it  WELL  CAN  BE." — The  Times. 

THE  ORDERS  OF  ARCHITECTURE.   Greek,  Roman 

iand  Italian.  A  selection  of  typical  examples  from  Nor- 
mand's  Parallels  and  other  Authorities,  with  notes  on  the 
Origin  and  Development  of  the  Classic  Orders  and  descrip- 
tions of  the  plates,  by  B.  Phene  Spiers,  F.S.A.,  Master  of 
the  Architectural  School  of  the  Royal  Academy.  Fourth 
Edition,  revised  and  enlarged,  containing  27  full-page  Plates, 
seven  of  which  have  been  specially  prepared  for  the  work. 
Imperial  4to,  cloth,  IO5.  M. 
"An  indispensable  possession  to  all  students  of  architecture." — The  Architect. 

THE  ARCHITECTURE  OF  GREECE  AND  ROME. 

I  A  Sketch  of  its  Historic  Development.  By  W.  J. 
Anderson,  Author  of  "  The  Architecture  of  the  Renaissance 
in  Italy,"  and  R.  Phene  Spiers,  F.S.A.  Containing  300 
pages  of  text,  and  185  Illustrations  from  photographs  and 
drawings,  including  43  full-page  Plates,  of  which  27  are 
finely  printed  in  collotype.  Large  8vo,  cloth,  18s.  net. 
"  It  is  such  a  work  as  many  students  of  architecture  and  the  classics  have  vainly 
earned  for,  and  lost  precious  years  in  supplying  its  place." — The  Architect. 

"  The  whole  conveys  a  vivid  and  scholarly  picture  of  classic  ai-t." — The  British  Architect. 

THE  ARCHITECTURE  OF  THE  RENAISSANCE  IN 
ITALY.  A  General  View  for  the  Use  of  Students  and 
Others.  By  William  J.  Anderson,  A.R.I.B.A.  Third  Edition, 
containing  64  full-page  Plates,  mostly  reproduced  from 
Photographs,  and  98  Illustrations  in  the  Text.  Large  8vo, 
cloth,  12s.  6d  net. 

"A  delightful  and  scholarly  book,  which  should  prove  a  boon    to  architects  and 
idents. "—.^ourwaZ  R.I.B.A. 

'Should  rank  amongst  the  best  architectural  writings  of  the  day."— r/^e  Edinburgh 
ieview. 


14 

A    NEW  AND   EPOOH-MAKINQ    BOOK. 

GOTHIC     ARCHITECTURE     IN     ENGLAND.      An 

Analysis  of  the  origin  and  development  of  English  Church 
Architecture,  from  the  Norman  Conquest  to  the  Dissolution 
of  the  Monasteries.  By  Francis  Bond,  M.A.,  Hon.  A.R.I.B.A., 
Containing  800  pp.,  with  1,254  Illustrations,  comprising  785 
photographs,  sketches,  and  measured  drawings,  and  469  plans, 
sections,  diagrams,  and  moldings.   Imperial  8vo.    31s.  ^d.  net. 

"The  fullest  and  most  complete  illustrated  treatise  on  the  subject  which. has  yet 
appeared.  ...  It  is  a  book  which  every  student  of  architecture,  professional  or  amateur, 
ought  to  have." — The  Builder. 

"  Perfectly  orderly,  and  most  complete  and  thorough,  this  g^reat  book  leaves  nothing 
to  be  desired," — The  Building  News. 

"It  brings  the  study  of  architecture  up  to  the  standard  of  modem  ideals,  and  should, 
we  expect,  long  remain  the  best  book  of  its  kind  in  the  language."— TA^  British  Architect. 


EARLY  RENAISSANCE  ARCHITECTURE  IN  ENG- 
LAND. An  Historical  and  Descriptive  Account  of  the 
Tudor,  Elizabethan  and  Jacobean  Periods,  1500 — 1625.  By 
J.  Alfred  Gotch,  F.S.A.  With  88  photographic  and  other 
Plates  and  230  Illustrations  in  the  Text  from  Drawings  and 
Photographs.     Large  8vo,  cloth,  21s.  net. 

•'  A  more  delightful  book  for  the  architect  it  would  be  hard  to  find.  The  author's 
well-chosen  illustrations  and  careful,  well-written  descriptions  hold  one's  interest  over  the 
whole  266  pages  of  the  book.  Mr.  Gotch  shows  how  architecture  developed  from  the  pure 
Gothic  through  Tudor,  Elizabethan,  and  Jacobean  phases,  imtil  the  full  Renaissance,  when 
classical  features  obtained  the  mastery  over  our  English  work.  The  book  is  quite  a  store- 
house of  reference  and  illustration,  and  should  be  quite  indispensable  to  the  architect's 
library."— :/7u5  British  Architect. 

CLASSIC  ARCHITECTURE.  A  Series  of  Ten  Plates  (size 
20  in.  X  15  in.)  of  examples  of  the  Greek  and  Roman  Orders, 
with  full  details  and  a  Selection  of  Classic  Ornament.  By 
Charles  F.  Mitchell  and  George  A.  Mitchell,  Lecturers 
on  Architecture,  Regent  Street  Polytechnic,  W.  With  de- 
scriptive letterpress,  in  portfolio,  price  6s.  net,  or  the  Set  of 
10  plates  without  text  or  portfolio,  price  5s.  net. 

The  Examples  illustrated  are  as  follows  : — Plate  I. — Doric  Order 
from  the  Parthenon,  Athens.  II.— Ionic  Order  from  the  Erechtheion, 
Athens.  III.  Corinthian  Order  from  the  Monument  of  Lysicrates, 
Athens.  IV. — Tuscan  Order,  with  Portion  of  Arcade,  based  upon  the 
design  of  Barozzi  of  Vignola.  V. — Doric  Order  from  the  Theatre  of 
Marcellus,  Rome.  VI.— Ionic  Order  from  the  Temple  of  Fortuna 
Virilis.  VII.— Corinthian  Order  from  the  Temple  of  Castor  and  Pollux 
(Jupiter  Stator),  Rome.  VIII. — Composite  Order  from  the  Arch  of 
Septimius  Severus,  Rome.  IX. — Examples  of  Greek  Ornament.  X. — 
Typical  Roman  Ornament  from  Buildings  in  Rome. 


B.  T.  BATSFORD,  94,  high  holborn,  London. 


TG 
270 


Hardy,  Edward 

of  li!  ^}^^^^tary  principles 
of  graphic  statics